Caesar II 2011 User Guide

CAESAR II 2011 User Guide
Copyright 1985-2011 Intergraph CAS Inc., All Rights Reserved.

Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1
What is CAESAR II? ................................................................................................................................ 1-2
What are the Applications of CAESAR II? .............................................................................................. 1-3
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress Packages? ....................................................... 1-4
About the CAESAR II Documentation ..................................................................................................... 1-5
Program Support/User Assistance ............................................................................................................ 1-6
Software Revision Procedures .................................................................................................................. 1-8
Identifying Builds .......................................................................................................................... 1-8
Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version? ..................................................................................... 1-8
Announcing Builds ........................................................................................................................ 1-8
Obtaining Builds ............................................................................................................................ 1-8
What is Contained In A Specific Build?........................................................................................ 1-8
Installing Builds ............................................................................................................................ 1-9
Detecting/Checking Builds ............................................................................................................ 1-9
Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched Version .................................................................... 1-9
Updates and License Types .................................................................................................................... 1-10
Full Run ....................................................................................................................................... 1-10
Lease ............................................................................................................................................ 1-10
Limited Run ................................................................................................................................. 1-10
Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-1
CAESAR II Quick Reference ................................................................................................................... 2-2
Starting CAESAR II ...................................................................................................................... 2-2
Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Piping Input Generation ................................................................................................................ 2-6
Error Checking the Model ............................................................................................................. 2-9
Building Load Cases.................................................................................................................... 2-11
Executing Static Analysis ............................................................................................................ 2-12
Static Output Review ................................................................................................................... 2-13
Chapter 3 Main Menu 3-1
The CAESAR II Main Menu .................................................................................................................... 3-2
File Menu .................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
Input Menu................................................................................................................................................ 3-6
Analysis Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure ................................................................................. 3-9
Output Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 3-10
Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3-11
C2Isogen Export .......................................................................................................................... 3-12
Diagnostics Menu ................................................................................................................................... 3-16
ESL Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 3-17
View Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3-18
Help Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 3-19

2 Contents

Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-1
Spreadsheet Overview .............................................................................................................................. 4-2
Customize Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 4-3
Data Fields ................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
Node Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 4-4
Element Lengths ............................................................................................................................ 4-4
Element Direction Cosines ............................................................................................................ 4-5
Pipe Section Properties .................................................................................................................. 4-5
Operating Conditions: Temperatures and Pressures ...................................................................... 4-6
Special Element Information ......................................................................................................... 4-7
Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 4-8
Loading Conditions ....................................................................................................................... 4-8
Piping Material .............................................................................................................................. 4-8
Material Elastic Properties ............................................................................................................ 4-9
Densities ........................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Auxiliary Data Area ................................................................................................................................ 4-10
Flange Checks - Equipment Screening ........................................................................................ 4-10
Bend Data .................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Rigid Weight ............................................................................................................................... 4-12
Restraints ..................................................................................................................................... 4-13
Expansion J oint ........................................................................................................................... 4-14
Displacements ............................................................................................................................. 4-15
Equipment Checks/Screening ...................................................................................................... 4-15
Forces .......................................................................................................................................... 4-17
Entering Line Numbers ............................................................................................................... 4-18
Uniform Loads ............................................................................................................................ 4-19
Wind/Wave .................................................................................................................................. 4-20
Allowable Stresses ...................................................................................................................... 4-21
Stress Intensification Factors/Tees .............................................................................................. 4-23
Flexible Nozzles .......................................................................................................................... 4-24
Hangers ........................................................................................................................................ 4-25
Node Names ................................................................................................................................ 4-26
Offsets ......................................................................................................................................... 4-27
Menu Commands .................................................................................................................................... 4-28
File Menu .................................................................................................................................... 4-28
Edit Menu .................................................................................................................................... 4-30
Model Menu ................................................................................................................................ 4-35
Break ........................................................................................................................................... 4-35
Environment Menu ...................................................................................................................... 4-38
Tools Menu.................................................................................................................................. 4-41
3-D Modeler............................................................................................................................................ 4-46
3D Graphics Configuration ......................................................................................................... 4-52
User Options ................................................................................................................................ 4-54
HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations .................................................................................................. 4-56
3D Graphic Highlights: Diameters, Wall, Insulation, Cladding & Refractory Thickness, Materials, Piping
Codes ........................................................................................................................................... 4-57
3D Graphics Highlights: Corrosion and Densities ...................................................................... 4-58
3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads ............... 4-60
Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info; Find Node, Range & Cutting Plane ............................ 4-61
Save an Image for Later Presentation: TIF, HTML, BMP, J PEG and PDF ................................ 4-63
3D Graphics Interactive Feature: Walk Through ........................................................................ 4-64
Resizing Models ......................................................................................................................... 4-65

Contents 3

Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-1
Error Checking .......................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Fatal Error Message ....................................................................................................................... 5-3
Warning Message .......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Note Message ................................................................................................................................ 5-5
Static Load Case Editor ............................................................................................................................ 5-6
Building Static Load Cases ....................................................................................................................... 5-8
Load Case Definition in CAESAR II ............................................................................................ 5-8
Load Cases with Hanger Design ................................................................................................... 5-9
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements ...................................................................................... 5-9
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and Settlement ........................................................... 5-10
Load Cases with Pitch and Roll ................................................................................................... 5-10
Load Cases for Other Types of Occasional Loads ...................................................................... 5-11
Static Seismic Load Cases ........................................................................................................... 5-12
Providing Wind Data .............................................................................................................................. 5-15
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters.................................................................................................... 5-17
Execution of Static Analysis ................................................................................................................... 5-18
Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases .......................................................................................................... 5-20
Definition of a Load Case ........................................................................................................... 5-20
Load Case Options Tab ............................................................................................................... 5-25
User Control of Produced Results Data ....................................................................................... 5-25
Output Status ............................................................................................................................... 5-25
Output Type ................................................................................................................................. 5-26
Snubbers Active? ......................................................................................................................... 5-26
Hanger Stiffness .......................................................................................................................... 5-26
Friction Multiplier ....................................................................................................................... 5-26
Elastic Modulus ........................................................................................................................... 5-27
User-Controlled Combination Methods ...................................................................................... 5-27
Algebraic ..................................................................................................................................... 5-27
Scalar ........................................................................................................................................... 5-27
SRSS............................................................................................................................................ 5-27
ABS ............................................................................................................................................. 5-27
Max.............................................................................................................................................. 5-28
Min .............................................................................................................................................. 5-28
SignMax ...................................................................................................................................... 5-28
SignMin ....................................................................................................................................... 5-28
Recommended Load Cases .......................................................................................................... 5-28
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection ........................................................................ 5-29
Chapter 6 Static Output Processor 6-1
Entering the Static Output Processor ........................................................................................................ 6-2
Standard Toolbar ...................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Reports Navigation Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 6-6
Custom Reports Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 6-8
Report Template Editor ............................................................................................................................ 6-9
Filtering Reports ..................................................................................................................................... 6-12
Report Options ........................................................................................................................................ 6-14
Displacements ............................................................................................................................. 6-14
Restraints ..................................................................................................................................... 6-15
Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates ........................................................................ 6-16
Restraint Summary ...................................................................................................................... 6-18
Nozzle Check Report ................................................................................................................... 6-19

4 Contents

Flange Reports ............................................................................................................................. 6-20
Global Element Forces ................................................................................................................ 6-21
Local Element Forces .................................................................................................................. 6-22
Stresses ........................................................................................................................................ 6-23
Stress Summary ........................................................................................................................... 6-24
Code Compliance Report ............................................................................................................ 6-25
Cumulative Usage Report ............................................................................................................ 6-26
General Computed Results ..................................................................................................................... 6-27
Load Case Report ........................................................................................................................ 6-27
Hanger Table with Text ............................................................................................................... 6-28
Input Echo ................................................................................................................................... 6-28
Miscellaneous Data ..................................................................................................................... 6-29
Warnings ..................................................................................................................................... 6-30
Output Viewer Wizard ............................................................................................................................ 6-31
Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes ................................................................................................ 6-32
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor ............................................................................. 6-34
Animation of Static Results Notes .......................................................................................................... 6-38
Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-1
Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II ....................................................................................................... 7-2
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................. 7-3
Major Steps in Dynamic Input....................................................................................................... 7-4
Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview .......................................................................................... 7-5
Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu ................................................................................. 7-5
Input Overview Based on Analysis Category ........................................................................................... 7-7
Modal ............................................................................................................................................ 7-7
Specifying the Loads ..................................................................................................................... 7-7
Snubbers ........................................................................................................................................ 7-7
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard ........................................................................ 7-8
Save to File .................................................................................................................................... 7-9
OK ................................................................................................................................................. 7-9
Cancel ............................................................................................................................................ 7-9
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-10
Importance Factor ........................................................................................................................ 7-11
Seismic Coefficient Ca ................................................................................................................ 7-11
Seismic Coefficient Cv ................................................................................................................ 7-11
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-12
Importance Factor I
p
7-12 ....................................................................................................................
Site Coefficient Fa ....................................................................................................................... 7-13
Site Coefficient Fv ....................................................................................................................... 7-13
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS) ...................................................................................... 7-13
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1) ....................................................................................... 7-13
Response Modification R
p
7-13 ..........................................................................................................
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-14
Importance Factor ........................................................................................................................ 7-14
Site Coefficient Fa ....................................................................................................................... 7-14
Site Coefficient Fv ....................................................................................................................... 7-14
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS) ...................................................................................... 7-14
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1) ....................................................................................... 7-14
Response Modification R ............................................................................................................ 7-15
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-17
Opening Time (milliseconds) ...................................................................................................... 7-18
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-18
Max. Table Frequency ................................................................................................................. 7-19
Number of Points ......................................................................................................................... 7-19
Enter Pulse Data .......................................................................................................................... 7-19

Contents 5

Generate Spectrum ...................................................................................................................... 7-19
Control Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 7-23
Advanced Parameters Show Screen ............................................................................................ 7-23
Harmonic ................................................................................................................................................ 7-24
Specifying the Loads ................................................................................................................... 7-24
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model.......................................................................................... 7-25
Earthquake (Spectrum) ........................................................................................................................... 7-27
Spectrum Load Cases .................................................................................................................. 7-29
Static/Dynamic Combinations ..................................................................................................... 7-30
Advanced Parameters .................................................................................................................. 7-31
Relief Loads (Spectrum) ......................................................................................................................... 7-32
Relief Load Synthesis .................................................................................................................. 7-32
Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) ................................................................................................... 7-33
Specifying the Load ..................................................................................................................... 7-33
Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation ....................................................................................... 7-33
Spectrum Definitions ................................................................................................................... 7-33
Force Sets .................................................................................................................................... 7-33
Spectrum Load Cases .................................................................................................................. 7-33
Time History ........................................................................................................................................... 7-34
Specifying The Load ................................................................................................................... 7-34
Time History Profile Definitions ................................................................................................. 7-34
Force Sets .................................................................................................................................... 7-34
Time History Load Cases ............................................................................................................ 7-35
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models ........................................................................................ 7-35
Advanced ..................................................................................................................................... 7-35
Error Handling and Analyzing the J ob ................................................................................................... 7-36
Performing the Analysis .............................................................................................................. 7-36
Modes .......................................................................................................................................... 7-36
Harmonic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-37
Selection of Phase Angles ........................................................................................................... 7-37
Spectrum ...................................................................................................................................... 7-38
Time History................................................................................................................................ 7-38
Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing 8-1
Entry into the Processor ............................................................................................................................ 8-2
Report Types ............................................................................................................................................. 8-4
Displacements ............................................................................................................................... 8-4
Restraints ....................................................................................................................................... 8-4
Local Forces .................................................................................................................................. 8-5
Global Forces ................................................................................................................................ 8-6
Stresses .......................................................................................................................................... 8-7
Forces/Stresses .............................................................................................................................. 8-8
Cumulative Usage ......................................................................................................................... 8-9
Mass Participation Factors .......................................................................................................... 8-10
Natural Frequencies ..................................................................................................................... 8-11
Modes Mass Normalized ............................................................................................................. 8-11

6 Contents

Modes Unity Normalized ............................................................................................................ 8-12
Included Mass Data ..................................................................................................................... 8-12
Input Listing ................................................................................................................................ 8-13
Mass Model ................................................................................................................................. 8-13
Boundary Conditions ................................................................................................................... 8-14
Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File ........................................................................................ 8-15
3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor .................................................................................. 8-16
Save Animation to File ................................................................................................................ 8-17
Animation of Static Results - Displacements .............................................................................. 8-17
Animation of Dynamic Results Modal/Spectrum ..................................................................... 8-18
Animation of Dynamic Results Harmonic ............................................................................... 8-18
Animation of Dynamic Results Time History .......................................................................... 8-18
Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-1
Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II .................................................................................... 9-2
3D/HOOPS Graphics ................................................................................................................................ 9-7
Sample Input ............................................................................................................................................. 9-9
Structural Steel Example #1.................................................................................................................... 9-10
Chapter 10 Buried Pipe Modeling 10-1
Modeler Overview .................................................................................................................................. 10-2
Using the Underground Pipe Modeler .................................................................................................... 10-3
Notes on the Soil Model ......................................................................................................................... 10-8
CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng) ................................................................................................. 10-9
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model ................................................................................... 10-10
Recommended Procedures .................................................................................................................... 10-15
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 10-16
Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-1
Equipment and Component Evaluation .................................................................................................. 11-2
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors .............................................................................................. 11-3
Bend Stress Intensification Factors ......................................................................................................... 11-6
Pressure Stiffening ...................................................................................................................... 11-7
Flanges Attached to Bend Ends ................................................................................................... 11-8
Bends with Trunnions.................................................................................................................. 11-8
Stress Concentrations and Intensification .................................................................................... 11-8
WRC 107 Vessel Stresses ....................................................................................................................... 11-9
WRC 107 Stress Summations.................................................................................................... 11-12
WRC Bulletin 297 ................................................................................................................................ 11-14
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations ..................................................................................................... 11-15
Bolt Tightening Stress Notes ..................................................................................................... 11-19
Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler ..................................................................................... 11-20
Leak Pressure Ratio ................................................................................................................... 11-20
Effective Gasket Modulus ......................................................................................................... 11-21
Flange Rating ............................................................................................................................ 11-21
Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines B31G ................................................................................ 11-23
Expansion J oint Rating ......................................................................................................................... 11-27
Structural Steel Checks - AISC............................................................................................................. 11-34
Global Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 11-34
Structural Code .......................................................................................................................... 11-35

Contents 7

Allowable Stress Increase Factor .............................................................................................. 11-35
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz ................................................................................... 11-35
Youngs Modulus ...................................................................................................................... 11-35
Material Yield Strength ............................................................................................................. 11-35
Bending Coefficient................................................................................................................... 11-35
Form Factor Qa ......................................................................................................................... 11-35
Allow Sidesway ......................................................................................................................... 11-36
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . . ................................................................... 11-36
Minimum Desired Unity Check ................................................................................................ 11-36
Maximum Desired Unity Check ................................................................................................ 11-36
Local Member Data ................................................................................................................... 11-36
Member Start Node ................................................................................................................... 11-37
Member End Node .................................................................................................................... 11-37
Member Type ............................................................................................................................ 11-37
In- And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz .............................................................. 11-37
Unsupported Axial Length ........................................................................................................ 11-37
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending) ................................................................................... 11-37
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending) .......................................................................... 11-37
Double Angle Spacing ............................................................................................................... 11-38
Youngs Modulus ...................................................................................................................... 11-38
Material Yield Strength ............................................................................................................. 11-38
Axial Member Force.................................................................................................................. 11-38
In-Plane Bending Moment ........................................................................................................ 11-38
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment ................................................................................................. 11-38
In-Plane Small Bending Moment ........................................................................................... 11-38
In-Plane Large Bending Moment ........................................................................................... 11-38
Out-of-Plane Small Bending Moment ................................................................................... 11-38
Out-of-Plane Large Bending Moment ................................................................................... 11-38
AISC Output Reports ................................................................................................................ 11-39
Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Codes .............................................................. 11-40
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ........................................................................................................... 11-41
NEMA Turbine Example .......................................................................................................... 11-42
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ............................................................................................................... 11-48
Vertical In-Line Pumps ............................................................................................................. 11-53
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ..................................................................................................... 11-54
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ............................................................................................... 11-56
Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters ........................................................ 11-61
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ....................................................................... 11-62

Chapter 1 Introduction
In This Chapter
What is CAESAR II? ............................................................ 1-2
What are the Applications of CAESAR II? .......................... 1-3
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress Packages? 1-4
About the CAESAR II Documentation ................................. 1-5
Program Support/User Assistance ........................................ 1-6
Software Revision Procedures .............................................. 1-8
Updates and License Types ................................................... 1-10

C H A P T E R 1

1-2 Introduction

What is CAESAR II?
CAESAR II is a PC based pipe stress analysis software program developed, marketed and sold by Intergraph CAS.
This software package is an engineering tool used in the mechanical design and analysis of piping systems. The
CAESAR II user creates a model of the piping system using simple beam elements and defines the loading
conditions imposed on the system. With this input, CAESAR II produces results in the form of displacements,
loads, and stresses throughout the system. Additionally, CAESAR II compares these results to limits specified by
recognized codes and standards. The popularity of CAESAR II is a reflection of our expertise in programming
and engineering, as well as our dedication to service and quality.


What are the Applications of CAESAR II?
CAESAR II is most often used for the mechanical design of new piping systems. Hot piping systems present a
unique problem to the mechanical engineer. These irregular structures experience great thermal strain that must
be absorbed by the piping, supports, and attached equipment. These structures must be stiff enough to support
their own weight and also flexible enough to accept thermal growth. The loads, displacements, and stresses can
be estimated through analysis of the piping model in CAESAR II. To aid in this design by analysis, CAESAR II
incorporates many of the limitations placed on these systems and their attached equipment. These limits are
typically specified by engineering bodies (such as the ASME B31 committees, ASME Section VIII, and the
Welding Research Council) or by manufacturers of piping-related equipment (API, NEMA, or EJ MA).
CAESAR II is not limited to thermal analysis of piping systems. CAESAR II also has the capability of modeling and
analyzing the full range of static and dynamic loads, which may be imposed on the system. Therefore, CAESAR II

is not only a tool for new design but it is also valuable in troubleshooting or redesigning existing systems. Here,
one can determine the cause of failure or evaluate the severity of unanticipated operating conditions such as
fluid/piping interaction or mechanical vibration caused by rotating equipment.

1-4 Introduction

What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress
Packages?
Intergraph CAS treatsCAESAR II more as a service than a product. Our staff of experienced pipe stress engineers
are involved in day-to-day software development, program support, and training. This approach has produced a
program, which most closely fits todays requirements of the pipe stress industry. Data entry is simple and
straight forward through annotated input screens and/or spreadsheets. CAESAR II provides the widest range of
modeling and analysis capabilities without becoming too complicated for simple system analysis. Users may
tailor their CAESAR II installation through default setting and customized databases. Comprehensive input
graphics confirms the model construction before the analysis is made. The programs interactive output
processor presents results on the monitor for quick review or sends complete reports to a file or printer.
CAESAR II not only uses standard analysis guidelines, and provides the latest recognized opinions for these
analyses.
CAESAR II also offers seamless interaction with our CADWorx/Plant, an AutoCAD based design and drafting
system for creating orthographic, isometric, and 3D piping drawings. The two-way-link automatically generates
stress analysis models of piping layouts, or creates spectacular stress isometrics in minutes from CAESAR II
models. CAESAR II

is a field-proven engineering analysis program. It is a widely recognized product with a large
customer base and an excellent support and development record. Intergraph CAS is a strong and stable company
where service is a major commitment.


About the CAESAR II Documentation
To address the sheer volume of information available on CAESAR II
1. The User Guide describes the basic operation and flow of the many routines found in
and present it in a concise and useful manner
to the analyst the program documentation is presented in four separate manuals:
CAESAR II
2. The Technical Reference Manual explains the function of, input for, and output from each module of the
program. This manual also explains much of the theory behind
. This
manual gives an overview of the program capabilities, and introduces model creation, analysis, and
output review. It is intended as a general road map for the program. This general document is the first
source of information.
CAESAR II
3. The Application Guide provides examples of how to use
calculations. The Technical
Reference Manual should be referred to whenever the user needs more information than is provided by
the User Guide.
CAESAR II
4. The Quick Reference Guide provides the user with version and technical change details in addition to
installation, and commonly referenced information.
. These examples illustrate methods
of modeling individual piping components as well as complete piping systems. Here one can find
tutorials on system modeling and analysis. The Application Guide is a reference providing quick how
to information on specific subjects.
Users can view and print any of the above manuals by clicking the HELP/ONLINE DOCUMENTATION from the Main
Menu found in CAESAR II

.

1-6 Introduction

Program Support/User Assistance
Our staff understands that CAESAR II
Intergraph CAS understands the engineers need to produce efficient, economical, and expeditious designs. To
that end, Intergraph CAS has a staff of helpful professionals ready to address any
is not only a complex analysis tool but also, at times, an elaborate process.
One that may not be obvious to the casual user. While our documentation is intended to address the questions
raised regarding piping analysis, system modeling, and results interpretation, not all the answers can be quickly
found in these volumes.
CAESAR II issues raised by all
users. CAESAR II support is available by telephone, fax, by mail, and the internet. To further aid internet users
when contacting technical support, Intergraph CAS has added an option that generates an e-mail template with
the basic machine and CAESAR II version details for a user. This information is typically what is needed to
resolve technical support issues. To use this option, from theHelp Menu select Email CAESAR II Support.

This selection launches the default e-mail client and populates an e-mail with the information displayed in the
figure below. Note, your information will vary.


Note that the e-mail is properly addressed to Technical Support and contains all information relevant to your
CAESAR II installation. You enter the problem description at theType Message Here
Formal training in
prompt and attach any
necessary files. Intergraph CAS provides program support at no additional charge to the user. It is expected,
however, that questions focus on the current version of the program.
CAESAR II
Intergraph CAS Technical Support:
and pipe stress analysis is also available from Intergraph CAS. Intergraph CAS
conducts regular training classes in Houston and provides in-house and open attendance courses around the
world. These courses focus on the expertise available at Intergraph CAS for modeling, analysis, and design.
Phone: 281-890-4566 E-mail: caesarii@intergraph.com
Fax: 281-890-3301 Web: www.coade.com

1-8 Introduction

Software Revision Procedures
Intergraph CAS software products are not static; they are changed continually to reflect engineering code
addenda, operational enhancements, user requests, operating system modifications, and corrections. New
versions are planned and targeted for a specific release date. However, there may be corrections necessary to the
currently shipping version, before the next version can be released. When this occurs, a correction to the
currently shipping version is made. This correction is referred to as a Build.
Changes and corrections are accumulated until an error producing incorrect results is found. When this occurs,
the build is finalized, announced, and posted to the web site. Some Intergraph CAS users have expressed concern
over tracking, archiving, and distributing the various builds generated between major releases. To alleviate this
problem for our users, all maintenance builds for new releases contain all previous builds. In other words, Build
Y contains Build X. This increases the download size and time required to obtain the build, but only one build is
required at any given time.

Identifying Builds
When posted on the Web, builds are identified with the program identifier and the date the Build was generated
for example C2YYY-YYMMDD.EXE.

Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version?
No! As new versions are released, additional input items become necessary and must be stored in the program
data files. In addition, file formats change; databases grow, and so on. A build is intended for one specific
version of the software. Using a Build on a different version (without specific advice from Intergraph CAS
personnel) is a sure way to cripple the software.

Announcing Builds
When a Build becomes available, the NEWS file maintained on the Web site is updated. All entries in this news
file are dated for ease of reference. You should check one of these news files at least once a month to ensure they
stay current with the software.
Corrections and builds are also published in the Intergraph CAS newsletter, Mechanical Engineering News.
If users register with an e-mail address, they will be notified via e-mail of all new builds.

Obtaining Builds
Builds are posted to our website at http://www.coade.com and are arranged in subdirectories by program. Each
file contained in the directory includes a description defining what it contains, its size, and the date it was
created. Decide which build file you need and download it.

What is Contained In A Specific Build?
Each patch file contains a file named BUILD.TXT. This is a plain ASCII text file that can be viewed with any
text editor or sent to the system printer. This text file contains a description of all corrections and enhancements
made, which are contained in the current patch. When necessary, additional usage instructions may be found in
this file.


Installing Builds
Builds distributed for Windows applications use a Windows installation procedure. The executable is a self-
extracting archive, which extracts to a number of sub-directories; each containing sufficient files to fit on a CD.
The CD contains a standard SETUP.EXE program to actually install the Build. This procedure ensures that
necessary files are registered with the system and that the Uninstall utility can perform its task.

Detecting/Checking Builds
When a Build is ready to be released, the Main Menu module is revised to reflect the Build level. This allows
the user to see, on theMain Program
From the
menu, which Build is in use. To see which program modules have been
modified, you can run an Intergraph CAS utility program from within the program directory.
Diagnostics menu, select theBuild Version
By reviewing the following table, users can determine which modules have been patched and to what level.
option. This option scans each of the EXE modules in the
program directory and lists its size, memory requirements, and build level. A sample display from this utility is
shown in the table below.

Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched Version
When a new version of the software is released, what should be done with the old, existing version? The
distribution disks sent from Intergraph CAS
To reinstall an older version of the software, the distribution CDs from
should obviously be saved. Additionally, any Builds obtained
should also be archived. This will allow full usage of this version at some later time, if it becomes necessary.
Intergraph CAS should be installed
first. Then, the last Build should be installed. Each Build includes the modifications made in all prior Builds.

1-10 Introduction

Updates and License Types
Users can identify CAESAR II update sets by their version number. The current release is CAESAR II 2011

.
Intergraph CAS schedules and distributes these updates approximately every nine months, depending on their
scope and necessity. The type of CAESAR II License determines whether or not a user receives these updates.
There are three types of CAESAR II Licenses.
Full Run
A full run provides unlimited access to CAESAR II

and one year of updates, maintenance, and support. Updates,
maintenance, and support are available on an annual basis after the first year.
Lease
A lease provides unlimited access to CAESAR II

with updates, maintenance, and support provided as long as the
lease is in effect.
Limited Run
A limited run provides 50 static or dynamic analyses of piping system models over an unlimited period of time,
but does not include program updates. The user is upgraded (if necessary) whenever a new set of 50 runs is
purchased.
Intergraph CAS only ships the current version of CAESAR II

, no matter which type of license. Updates are
automatically delivered to all lease users and to full run users who purchase updates, maintenance, and support,
and all lease users.

Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation
In This Chapter
CAESAR II Quick Reference ............................................... 2-2
Basic Operation ..................................................................... 2-6

C H A P T E R 2

2-2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

CAESAR II Quick Reference
This chapter explains the basics of CAESAR II operation, to enable users to quickly perform a static piping
analysis. All necessary user operations are discussed; however, details have been kept to a minimum. Each topic
includes references to other sections of the CAESAR II User Guide
The use of
for additional detailed information.
CAESAR II
There are several steps required to perform a static analysis, the major steps (and the chapters in which they are
described) display below. These steps are explained briefly in this chapter.
assumes that the software has been installed as per the instructions detailed in the Quick
Reference Guide.
START CAESAR II (Chapter 4)
GENERATE INPUT (Chapter 5)
PERFORM ERROR CHECKING (Chapter 6)
BUILD LOAD CASES (Chapter 6)
EXECUTE STATIC ANALYSIS (Chapter 6)
REVIEW OUTPUT (Chapter 7)
Note: A complete tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide

.
Starting CAESAR II
Launch CAESAR II by double-clicking the CAESAR I I icon, which should point to the program C2.EXE in the
CAESAR I I I nst al l at i on directory. Note that launching any of the other executable programs in the
CAESAR I I I nst al l at i on directory can result in unpredictable behavior, at this point the Main Menu
displays. It is from the Main Menu that users select jobs, analysis types, invoke executions, and initiate output
reviews. Mai n Menu options are described in detail in Chapter 4 of this documentfor the purposes of this
Quick Start chapter, only the File, Input, Analysis, and Output menus are used.

Main Menu
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposessubsequent input, analysis, or output
review references the job name specified. The job name is selected using the File menu, using one of three
methods.


New J ob Name Dialog
Whenever users wish to begin a new job, selecting File-New (or clicking the New icon from the toolbar)
requires the user to enter a job name and data directory. For the purposes of this example, users should enter a
name, select Piping Input, and select an alternate directory for the file, if desired.

Note: Selecting FILE-OPEN (or clicking the Open icon on the toolbar) presents users with a dialog to
select an existing file. Select recently used files from the RECENT PIPING/STRUCTURAL FILE option on the
Fi l e Menu.
Note: Enabling Structural Input opens the St r uc t ur al St eel Wi zar d
Selecting a job name does not open the file; as noted, it indicates the job on which input modeling, analysis,
. See Chapter 4 of the
CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for more information.


output review, or other operations will be done. Users must still select one of these operations from the menu.

Open Dialog

The
Fi l e Open / J ob Rol l -Bac k :
Fi l e Open dialog has been improved to permit the roll-back to earlier revisions of the (piping) input.
This procedure is illustrated in the following figures.

Open Dialog
Click FILE/OPEN from the Mai n Menu, then click on the desired job. Once a job has been selected, if there are
earlier revisions available, they are listed in the lower right corner of the dialog. Only 25 revisions are saved,
with the oldest being deleted if necessary.


To revert to an earlier revision, select the desired input from the list, based on the date stamp.

Clicking Open displays a confirmation dialog. Clicking Yes here restores the selected revision. CAESAR II
gives users the option to archive input files. Enter a password between 6 and 24 characters in length. You are
prompted to repeat this information to eliminate the possibility of incorrectly entering the password. Archived
input files cannot be altered and/or saved without this password however; they can be opened and reviewed.

Archive Password Dialog


Basic Operation
Once you have started the program and opened the file, you will choose the required operation.

Piping Input Generation
After specifying the job name users can launch the interactive model builder by selecting INPUT-PIPING from the
Main
Input generation of the model consists of describing the piping elements, as well as any external influences
(boundary conditions or loads) acting on those elements. Each pipe element is identified by two node numbers,
and requires the specification of geometric, cross sectional, and material data. The preferred method of data
entry is the
Menu.
Piping Spreadsheet.

Piping I nput Spreadsheet
Each pipe element is described on its own spreadsheet. Data, which is likely to be constant, is automatically


duplicated by CAESAR II
The menus, toolbars, and accelerators offer a number of additional commands that users can invoke to enter
auxiliary processors or use special modelers or databases. The commands and general input instructions of the
piping spreadsheet are discussed in detail in Chapter 5.
to subsequent spreadsheets. This means that for many elements, the user must only
confirm the numbers and enter the delta-dimensions. When necessary, point specific data can easily be entered
on the appropriate elements spreadsheet.
Entering the First Element (Element 10-20) of a Simple Model:
1 Enter the value 10-0 (10 ft) in theDX
2 Enter the value 8 (8-in. nominal) in the
field.
Diameter
3 Enter S (standard schedule pipe wall) in the
field. The program automatically converts this
value to the actual diameter.
Wt/Sch
4 Enter 600 (degrees Fahrenheit) in the
field. This is automatically converted to wall
thickness.
Temp 1
5 Enter 150 (psig) in the
field.
Pressure 1
6 Double-click the
field.
Bend check box. TheBends tab displays. This adds a long radius bend at the end
of the element, and adds intermediate nodes 18 and 19 at the near weld and mid points of the bend
respectively (node 20 physically represents the far weld point of the bend).

7 Double-click the Restraint check box. The Restraint tab displays. In the first Node field enter 10;
then select ANC from the first Type drop list.


8 Select A106 B from the Material
9 Double-click the
drop list. This selection fills in the material parameters such as
density and modulus elasticity.
Allowable Stress check box and select the B31.3 code from the Code drop list.
Note:
10 Enter 0.85SG (0.85 specific gravity) in the
Allowable stresses for the given material, temperature, and code display automatically.
Fluid Density field. The program automatically
converts this value to density. To enter the second element of the model, press Alt-C, or click the
Skip to Next Element icon, or use the Edit-Continue button to move to the spreadsheet for a new
element, element 20-30.
Note:
11 Enter the value 10-0 (10 feet) in the
Node numbers are automatically generated, distributed and data is carried forward from previous
spreadsheets.
DY
12 Double-click the
field.
Restraint check box. In the first Node field, enter 30; then select ANC from the
first Type
The two-element model (an ell-configuration anchored at each end) is now complete.
drop list.
The piping preprocessor also provides interactive graphics and listing functions to facilitate model editing and
verification. The CAESAR Ii Piping Preprocessor is designed to make these tasks intuitive and efficient. Model
verification can be performed using either the Graphics or List utilities, although a combination of both modes
is recommended. The Graphics and List utilities are discussed in Chapter 5 of this manual. The CAESAR II
Graphics screen, displays by default, next to the input spreadsheet. However, the spreadsheet can be collapsed
to provide maximum graphic space as shown below.


CAESAR I I I nput Graphics Screen
Once the model is completed, it must be checked for errors before analysis is permitted. This can be done using
theFile-Error Check menu option or the Error Check

icon on the toolbar.
Error Checking the Model
The two main functions of this error checker; is first to verify the users input data, and second to build the
execution data files utilized by the remainder of CAESAR II
Verification of the users input data consists of checking each individual piping element for consistency. Errors
discovered which would prevent
.
CAESAR II
Unusual items (such as a change of direction without a bend or intersection) are flagged as warnings to the user.
from running (such as a corrosion allowance greater than the wall
thickness) are flagged as fatal errors to the user.
Other messages, of an informational type, may show intermediate calculations or general notes.
Error messages display in red text, Notes display in blue text and Warnings display in green text.
All messages display in the Error Window next to the model graphics.


Clicking on an error or warning message highlights the associated element on the graphic display
and positions the spreadsheet to that element.
Users may review all the messages generated by using the scroll bar on the right side of the toolbar
or arrow keys.
Users can sort error messages by Message Number, Element or Node Number and Message Text,
by clicking the column titles.
Users can print the entire error report or selected sections by clicking the Print
Users can choose to display only fatal errors or all errors by clicking the arrow beside the
button.
Error
Checker
If there is an error, users can return to the input module by clicking the
icon.
Classic Piping Input
If the error check process completes without fatal errors, a center of gravity report is presented and the analysis
data files can be generated and then the solution phase can commence.
tab.

Center of Gravity Report


If fatal errors exist, the analysis data files are not generated and the solution phase cannot begin. Users must
make corrections and rerun the Error Checker

successfully before analysis is permitted.
Building Load Cases
You can start a static analysis from the Main Menu, or the Piping Input, once the analysis data files have been
generated by the error checker. The first stage of a static analysis is to set up the load cases. For new jobs no
previous solution files available, the static analysis module recommends load cases to you based on the load
types encountered in the input file. These recommended load cases are usually sufficient to satisfy the piping
code requirements for the Sustained and Expansion load cases. If the recommended load cases are not
satisfactory, you have the option of directly modifying them. Selecting theAnalysis-Statics option from the
Main Menu, or selecting the EDIT-EDIT STATIC LOAD CASES option from the piping preprocessor, launches the Load
Case Builder.

Load Case Builder
Loads can be built two ways by 1) combining the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements,
thermal cases, etc.) into load cases (basic cases), and 2) combining pre-existing load cases into new load cases
(combination cases).
Users can build the basic cases by selecting (one or more load components), dragging, and dropping load
components from the Loads Defined in Input list (in the left hand column) to the Load Cases list on the right
or by typing on any of the individual lines. Stress Types (indicating which code equations should be used to
calculate and check the stresses) can be selected from the Stress Type
Combination cases, if present, must always follow the basic cases. You can build combination cases by selecting
(1 or more load components), dragging, and dropping basic load cases from earlier in the load case list to
list on each line.


combine cases (or blank load cases) later in the Load Cases list.
Note:

The number of allowed static load cases has been increased to 999.
Executing Static Analysis
Once the load cases have been defined, the user begins the actual finite element solution through the use of the
File-Analyze command on the toolbar, or by clicking the Start Run icon on the toolbar located in the Static
Load Case Builder. The solution phase commences with the generation of the element stiffness matrices and
load vectors, and solves for displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. This solution phase also
performs the design and selection of spring hangers, and iterative stiffness matrix modifications for nonlinear
restraints. The user is kept apprised of the solution status throughout the calculation.


Static Output Review
A review of the static analysis results is possible immediately after a static solution or at a later time by selecting
the Output-Static option of the CAESAR II Main Menu. The static output processor presents the user with an
interactive selection menu from which load cases and report options can be selected.

Results can be reviewed by selecting one or more load cases along with one or more reports (selection is done by
clicking, Ctrl-clicking, and Shift-clicking the mouse). The results can be reviewed on the terminal, printed, or
sent to a file, by using the View Reports, MS Word, File-Save/SaveAs, or File-Print menu commands and/or
toolbars.


The user can also use the View-Plot menu command or the Plot toolbar to review the analytic results in graphics
mode, which can produce displaced shapes, stress distributions, and restraint actions.

Output Graphics Screen
The actual study of the results depends on the purpose of each load case, and the reason for the analysis. Usually
the review checks that the system stresses are below their allowables, restraint loads are acceptable, and
displacements are not excessive. Additional post processing (such as equipment, nozzle, and structural steel
checks) may be required depending on the model and type of analysis.
Once the review of the output is finished, the user can return to the main CAESAR II

menu by exiting the
output review module.

Chapter 3 Main Menu
In This Chapter
The CAESAR II Main Menu ................................................ 3-2
File Menu .............................................................................. 3-3
Input Menu ............................................................................ 3-6
Analysis Menu ...................................................................... 3-7
3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure ............. 3-9
Output Menu ......................................................................... 3-10
Tools Menu ........................................................................... 3-11
Diagnostics Menu ................................................................. 3-16
ESL Menu ............................................................................. 3-17
View Menu ............................................................................ 3-18
Help Menu............................................................................. 3-19
C H A P T E R 3

3-2 Main Menu

The CAESAR II Main Menu

CAESAR I I Main Menu
CAESAR II may be started by double-clicking the CAESAR II icon, or by running C2.EXE from the
CAESAR II Installation
After starting
directory.
CAESAR II, the Main Menu
The
appears. It is recommended that this screen be kept at its minimal size
(as shown above). This allows access to the toolbar while freeing most of the screen for other applications.
Main Menu is used to direct the actions of CAESAR II. As elsewhere in CAESAR II commands may be
accessed from menus, as well as toolbars and/or keystroke combinations. The available menu options are briefly
described here with further detail available elsewhere in this document or in the CAESAR II Technical Reference
Guide.


File Menu

The Fi l e
menu may be used to do the following:

Set Def aul t Dat a Di r ec t or ySets the default data (project) directory without selecting a specific job
file. Some CAESAR I I options do not require that a job be selected, but must know in which directory to
work.
Note
The selection of the data directory is very important since any configuration, units, or other data
files found in that directory are considered to be local to that job.
New
When New is selected, the user must designate whether this job is for a piping or structural model. The data
directory where the file is to be placed must be selected, either by entering it directly or by browsing.
Starts a new piping or structural job.
Note: Selecting St r uc t ur al I nput launches the St r uc t ur al St eel Wizard. For more
information, see Chapter 4 of the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for details.

File New Dialog Box
Open
When Open is chosen, the user is prompted to select an existing job file. Files of type Piping, Pre-version
3.24 piping, or Structural may be displayed for selection (see below).
Opens an existing piping or structural job.

3-4 Main Menu

The
Fi l e Open / J ob Rol l -Bac k :
Fi l e Open dialog box has been improved to permit the roll-back to earlier revisions of the (piping)
input. This procedure is illustrated in the following figures.

Open Dialog Box
Click FILE/OPEN from the Mai n Menu, then click on the needed job. Once a job has been selected, if there are
earlier revisions available, they are listed in the lower, right corner of the dialog. Only 25 revisions are saved,
with the oldest being deleted, if necessary.

To revert to an earlier revision, select the desired input from the list based on the date stamp.


Clicking Open displays a confirmation dialog. Clicking Yes
Recent Piping or Recent Structural Files Displays the four most recently-used piping or structural files in the
here restores the selected revision.
Fi l e
ExitCloses
menu.
CAESAR II
\
.

3-6 Main Menu

Input Menu

I nput Menu
Once a file is selected, theInput Menu indicates the available modules for the selected file type.
Option Description
Piping Inputs aCAESAR II Piping Model (see Chapter 5).
Underground Converts existing piping model to buried pipe (see Chapter 11).
Structural Steel Inputs a CAESAR II Structural Model (see Chapter 10).


Analysis Menu

Analysis Menu
The Analysis Menu allows the user to select from the different calculations available.
Option Description
Statics Performs Static analysis of pipe and/or structure. Available after error checking
the input files (see Chapter 6).
Dynamics Performs Dynamic analysis of pipe and/or structure. Available after error
checking the input files (see Chapter 8).
SIFs Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at
intersections and bends.
WRC 107/297 Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping (see Chapter 12).
Flanges Performs flange stress and leakage calculations (see Chapter 12).
B31.G Estimates pipeline remaining life (see Chapter 12).
Expansion J oint
Rating
Evaluates expansion joints using EJ MA equations (see Chapter 12).
AISC Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements (see Chapter 12).
NEMA SM23 Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles (see Chapter 12).

3-8 Main Menu

Option Description
API 610 Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps (see Chapter 12).
API 617 Evaluates piping loads on compressors (see Chapter 12).
API 661 Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers (see Chapter 12).
HEI Standard Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters (see Chapter 12).
API 560 Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters (see Chapter 12).


3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure
Button and Name Description
Temperatures
Highlight the pipe elements for a particular temperature vector in a different color. A
color key (legend) is included on the left side of the plot in a separate window. This option
can be used to quickly see temperature variations throughout the system. This is a good
way to verify that temperature changes have been made where appropriate. When more
than one operating temperature has been specified, a drop list is presented so that the
single desired temperature vector can be used in coloring the model.
Pressure
Clicking thePressure button produces results similar to the ones described in the
Temperature section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the
corresponding legend appears on the left. When more than one operating pressure has
been defined, a drop list with up to 9 pressures and a hydro pressure, HYD, as defined
choices appears.

Note: Only the pressures and temperatures that were actually defined in the input will appear in the
toolbar as a choice.
Note: The legend window may be resized, docked, and/or dragged away from the view.
Note: While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated.
Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can still be used without affecting the
model highlighted state.
Note: Clicking the same button twice will deactivate the coloring effect.
Note: The same functionality may be achieved from the Options Menu by selecting the
Temperatures or Pressures menu options. Alternatively, the Temperatures can be accessed by
pressing keyboard number buttons 1 through 9.
Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/ PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes
described herein, the color key legend displays in the upper left corner of the page. This is always true,
even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.

3-10 Main Menu

Output Menu

Output Menu
The user is presented with all available output of piping and/or structural calculations, which may be selected for
review.
Option Description
Statics Displays Static results (see Chapter 7).
Harmonic Displays Harmonic Loading results (see Chapter 9).
Spectrum Modal Displays Natural Frequency/Mode Shape calculations or Uniform/Force Spectrum
Loading results (see Chapter 9).
Time History Displays Time History Load Simulation results (see Chapter 9).
Animation Displays Animated Graphic simulations of any of the above results.


Tools Menu

Tools Menu
The Tools Menu includes various CAESAR II supporting utilities.
Option Description
Configure/Setup Customizes the behavior of CAESAR II on a directory by directory basis. Enables users
to consider items such as treatment of corrosion, pressure stiffening, and so on.
differently for each directory, due to project or client considerations.
Calculator Launches an on-screen calculator.
Make Units files Creates custom sets of units.
Material Data Base Edits or adds to the CAESAR II Material Data Base.
Accounting Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports.
Multi-J ob Analysis Enables the user to run a stream of jobs without operator intervention.
External Interfaces Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and analytical).
Isogen Isometrics Starts Isogen Isometrics.
I-Configure Starts I-Configure.
Explore System
Folder
Opens the CAESAR II System Folder.

3-12 Main Menu

C2Isogen Export
Using the Split option within C2Isogen in CAESAR II
Enables users to generate several isometric drawings separated at predefined nodes. This procedure assumes
users have previous experience using Isogen in CAESAR II
1. Start
.
C2Isogen by clicking the Generate Stress Isometrics button on the CAESAR II Main
menu.

2. Click Edit Stress Annotation and the Stress Isometric Annotations
3. Click the
screen displays to the right.
Split tab to display a list of nodes locations that can be the location for splitting.


4. Enable theNode 22 check box so that the entire isometric drawing will be cut at the middle of the
riser.

3-14 Main Menu

5. Click Create Isometric Drawing, then click OK to accept the default setting.

6. Two .dwg files are created. Highlight the first one and then click View to open it.


7. Repeat the step above to view the second drawing.
The two .dwg files are shown in DWG TrueView. The reference indicates that the two drawings are connected
at node 22.

3-16 Main Menu

Diagnostics Menu

Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics are provided to help trouble-shoot problem installations.
Option Description
CRC Check Verifies program files are not corrupted.
Build Version Determines the build version of CAESAR II files.
Error Review Reviews description of CAESAR II errors.
DLL Version Check Provides version information on library files used by CAESAR II.


ESL Menu

ESL Menu
The ESL Menu gives access to utilities, which interact with the External Software Lock.
Option Description
Show Data Displays data stored on the ESL.
Generate Access
Codes
Allows runs to be added or other ESL changes, to be made either through Fax or E-mail
(in conjunction with option below).
Enter re-authorization
Codes
(See option above).
Check HASP Device
Status
Verifies the location and version of the ESL.
Install HASP Device
Driver
Installs the ESL Drivers.

3-18 Main Menu

View Menu

View Menu
The View Menu allows users to enable the status bar and all toolbars.
Option Description
Toolbar Enable users to display and/or customize a toolbar.
Status Bar Enables users to display a status bar at the bottom of the window.


Help Menu

Help Menu
Option Description
On Line
Documentation
Displays CAESAR II documentation in HTML or PDF format.
Desktop On-Line
Help
Launches Intergraph CAS online technical support.
On-Line Registration Enables users with Internet access to register electronically with Intergraph CAS.
Information Provides information on the best ways to contact Intergraph CAS personnel for
technical support and provides Internet links for Intergraph CAS downloads and
information.
Check for Upgrades Enables users to verify the most current version of CAESAR II is installed.
About Displays CAESAR II CAESAR II version and copyright information.
Throughout CAESAR II context-sensitive, on-screen help is available by clicking ? or [F1

] while the cursor is in
any input field. A help screen displays showing a discussion and the required units, if applicable.

Chapter 4 Piping Input
In This Chapter
Spreadsheet Overview........................................................... 4-2
Data Fields ............................................................................ 4-4
Auxiliary Data Area .............................................................. 4-10
Menu Commands .................................................................. 4-28
3-D Modeler .......................................................................... 4-46

C H A P T E R 4

4-2 Piping Input

Spreadsheet Overview
In order to input a piping model, you must either open a new or existing piping file from the Main Menu, or then
choose INPUT-PIPING. The CAESAR II Piping Input spreadsheet then appears.

I nput Spreadsheet
This spreadsheet is used to describe the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menu
commands/toolbars, which can be used to perform a number of supporting operations and data fields used to
enter information about each piping element. A graphic representation of the model automatically plots on the
right and updates as new elements are added.


Customize Toolbar
CAESAR II enables the user to customize the Spreadsheet and 3D Graphic

toolbars. You can determine which
buttons display and their locations, by right-clicking the mouse on the toolbar, which displays the following
dialog

Customize Toolbar
Alternatively, users can customize the toolbar by pressing the <Shift>key, clicking a button and dragging it to
the new position. CAESAR II

allows users to undo any changes by right clicking on the toolbar, which causes the
Customize Toolbar dialog to appear, and clicking the Reset button.

4-4 Piping Input

Data Fields
Data fields are grouped logically into blocks of related data on the left side of the screen. The right side of the
screen offers an auxiliary area; with changing data-fields that support items entered through check boxes
(pressing [F12] alternatively displays the various auxiliary screens). The data fields may be torn apart by double-
clicking the [>>

] button in the upper right corner of each group. They can be arranged in any order, this aids in
conserving window real estate and increasing space for graphics. The following are the data-field blocks:
Node Numbers

Each element is identified by its end node number. Since each input screen represents a piping element, the
element end points - the From node and To node - must be entered. These points are used as locations at which
information may be entered or extracted. The From node and To node are both required data fields.
Note: CAESAR II

can generate both values if the AUTO_NODE_INCREMENT directive is set to
other than zero using the Tools-Configure/Setup option of the Main Menu.
Element Lengths

Lengths of the elements are entered as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate
system established for the piping system (note that the Y-axis represents the vertical axis). The delta dimensions
DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes between the From node and To node. In
most cases only one of the three cells will be used as the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the
piping element is skewed two or three entries must be made. One or more entries must be made for all elements
except zero length expansion joints.
Note:
Offsets can be used to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the orientation of its
neutral axis in 3-D space.
When using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid entries in this (and most
other length fields) include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.


Element Direction Cosines

Clicking the Ellipsis (...) button to the right of the element lengths (DX, DY, and DZ) displays the Element
dialog. The Element

dialog displays the total Length and Direction Cosines. Changes made to the total element
Length, or Direction Cosines may affect one or all of the element lengths (DX, DY, and DZ). Changes made to
any of the element lengths (DX, DY, and DZ) will affect both the total element Length and Direction Cosines.
Pipe Section Properties

The elements outside diameter, wall thickness, mill tolerance (plus mill tolerance is used for IGE/TD/12 piping
code only), and seam weld (IGE/TD/12 piping code only); corrosion allowance, and insulation thickness are
entered in this block. These data fields carry forward from one screen to the next during the input session and
need only be entered for those elements at which a change occurs. Nominal pipe sizes and schedules may be
specified; CAESAR II converts these values to actual outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside diameter and
wall thickness are required data inputs.
Note: Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe size
specification. ANSI, J IS, or DIN is set via the TOOLS-CONFIGURE/SETUP option of the Main Menu or the
Setup

toolbar button.

4-6 Piping Input

Operating Conditions: Temperatures and Pressures

Up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test pressure) can be specified for each
piping element. (The button with the ellipses dots is used to activate a window showing extended operating
conditions input). The temperatures are actual temperatures (not changes from ambient). CAESAR II uses these
temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As
an alternative, the thermal strains may be specified directly (see the discussion of ALPHA TOLERANCE in the
Technical Reference Manual). Thermal strains have absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless.
Pressures are entered as gauge values and may not be negative. Each temperature and each pressure entered
creates a loading for use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure data carries forward from one
element to the next until changed. Entering a value in the Hydro Pressure field causes CAESAR II to build a
Hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.
Note: CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70F, unless changed using the Special Execution
Parameters Option.


Special Element Information

Special components such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints and tees require additional information,
which can be defined by enabling the component and entering data in the auxiliary screen. If the element
described by the spreadsheet ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint, the Bend check box should be set by
double-clicking. This entry opens up the auxiliary data field on the right hand side of the input screen to accept
additional data regarding the bend. CAESAR II usually assigns three nodes to a bend (giving near, mid, and
far node on the bend). Double-clicking the Rigid check box (indicating an element that is much stiffer than the
connecting pipe such as a flange or valve) opens an auxiliary data field to collect the component weight. For
rigid elements, CAESAR II
When the rigid element weight is entered, i.e. not zero,
follows these rules:
CAESAR II
The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same weight that would be
computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of insulation added is equal to the same weight that would
be computed for an equivalent straight pipe times 1.75.
computes any extra weight due to insulation
and contained fluid, and adds it to the user-entered weight value.
If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II
The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter (and wall & thickness) entered. Make sure that the
diameter entered on a rigid element spreadsheet is indicative of the rigid stiffness that should be generated.
assumes the element is an artificial construction
element rather than an actual piping element, so no insulation or fluid weight is computed for that element.
If an element is an expansion joint, double-clicking that check box brings up an auxiliary screen, which prompts
for stiffness parameters and effective diameter. Expansion joints may be modeled as zero-length (with all
stiffnesses acting at a single point) or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In
the former case, all stiffness must be entered, in the latter; either the lateral or angular stiffness must be omitted.
Checking theSIF & Tees check box allows the user to specify any component having special stress
intensification factors (SIF). CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component.
Note: Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. Refer to the Valve/Flange and
Expansion Joint

database discussions later in this chapter for quick entry of rigid element and
expansion joint data.

4-8 Piping Input

Boundary Conditions

The checkboxes in this block open the auxiliary data field to allow the input of items, which restrain (or impose
movement on) the pipe restraints, hangers, flexible nozzles or displacements. Though not required, it is
recommended that such information be supplied on the input screen which has that point as the From node or To
node. (This will be of benefit if the data must be located for modification). The auxiliary data fields allow
specification of up to 4 restraints (devices which in some way modify the free motion of the system), one hanger,
one nozzle, or two sets of nodal displacements per element. If needed, additional items for any node can be input
on other element screens.

Loading Conditions

The check boxes in this block allow you to define loadings acting on the pipe. These loads may be individual
forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform loads (which can be specified on force per unit
length, or gravitational body forces), or wind loadings (wind loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape
factorthe loads themselves are specified when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape
factor check boxes will be unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were
removed from these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent screens.
Note:

You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special Execution
Options.
Piping Material

CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe materials elastic modulus, Poissons ratio, density, and (in most
cases) expansion coefficient. The program provides a database containing the parameters for many common
piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a material from the drop list, by entering the material
number, or by typing the entire material name and then picking it from the match list. (The coefficient of
expansion does not appear on the input screen, but it can be reviewed during error checking.) Note that materials
18 and 19 represent cold spring properties, cut short and cut long respectively; material 20 activates CAESAR II

s
orthotropic model for use with materials such as fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. Material 21 permits a totally
user defined material. Using a material with a number greater than 100 permits the use of allowable stresses
from the database.


Material Elastic Properties

This block is used to enter or override the elastic modulus and Poissons ratio of the material, if the value in the
database is not correct. These values must be entered for Material type 21 (user specified).
Note: Material properties in the database may be changed permanently using theCAESAR II
Material Database

editor.
Densities

The densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents are specified in this block. The piping material
density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material Database. You can also enter Fluid
density in terms of specific gravity, if convenient, by following the input immediately with the letters: SG, e.g.
0.85SG (there can be no spaces between the number and the SG).
Note: If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no insulation
density is entered, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.

4-10 Piping Input

Auxiliary Data Area
The Auxiliary data area is used to display or enter extended data associated with the check box fields.
The data in this area can be displayed by single clicking the appropriate box, or by toggling through the screens
with the use of the [F12] key or by clicking the appropriate tabs.
Note:

When there is no auxiliary data, the model status screen appears.
Flange Checks - Equipment Screening
This auxiliary screen is used to enter flange information for In-Line Flange evaluation. The dialog changes to
accommodate input for the two different methods of flange analysis available in CAESAR II. Values for both the
Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G can be Read from File if a user selects ASME 2003 from
the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box . The G values are in the text file ASME-2003.G located in system folder
of users application data directory.


Bend Data

This auxiliary screen is used to enter information regarding bend radius, miter cuts, fitting wall thickness,
stiffness factor (K-Factor), or attached flanges.
Intermediate node points may be placed at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend mid-point (M).

4-12 Piping Input

Rigid Weight

This auxiliary screen is used to enter the weight of a rigid element. If no weight is entered CAESAR II models the
element as a weightless construction element.
Note: Rigid weights are entered automatically if theValve and Flange

database is used.


Restraints

This auxiliary screen is used to enter data for up to four restraints per spreadsheet. Node number and restraint
Type are required; all other information is optional (omitting the stiffness entry defaults to rigid). Restraint
types may be selected from the drop list or typed in.
Note:

Skewed restraints may be entered by entering direction cosines with the type, such as X (1,0,1)
for a restraint running at 45 in the X-Z plane.

4-14 Piping Input

Expansion Joint

This auxiliary screen is used to enter the expansion joint stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For a non-
zero length expansion joint, either the transverse or bending stiffness must be omitted.
Note:

Setting the effective diameter to zero de-activates the pressure thrust load. This method may be
used (in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness) to simulate the effect of axial tie-rods.


Displacements

This auxiliary screen is used to enter imposed displacements for up to two nodes per spreadsheet. Up to nine
displacement vectors may be entered (load components D1 through D9). If a displacement value is entered for
any vector, this direction is considered to be fixed for any other non-specified vectors.
Note:

Leaving a direction blank for all nine vectors models the system as being free to move in that
direction. Specifying 0.0 implies that the system is fully restrained in that direction.
Equipment Checks/Screening
Equipment nozzle evaluation is one of the most important tasks in analyzing a piping system. The various
nozzle loads, when subjected to the operating criteria of the piping system, must be less than their associated
allowable loads. Verification of the nozzle loads is a time consuming task, which cant be performed until the
pipe stress requirements are met.
CAESAR II enables users to define overall nozzle limits in the input, which then permits a first pass screening to
be performed. Actual detailed nozzle evaluation can then be focused on those nozzles that fail this initial
screening.

4-16 Piping Input

To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below

The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) will be compared to
the limits. Once the analysis has been performed and the results are available, users can select the specific load
case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the Nozzle Check report. For more information on the
Nozzle Check

report see the Equipment Report.


Forces

This auxiliary screen is used to enter imposed forces and/or moments for up to two nodes per spreadsheet. Up to
nine force vectors may be entered (load components F1 through F9).

4-18 Piping Input

Entering Line Numbers
You can enter line numbers on an element spreadsheet or at the Line Number Auxillary box under the auxiliary
data area.

Line numbers carry forward to successive elements so its only necessary to enter data on the first element of a
new line.

To assign a line number name from the Line Number Auxillary
Move the cursor to the line number box or use the Quick J ump shortcut<
you can perform one of the following steps:
F9>and type. If youd
like CAESAR II to automatically assign a name, click the down arrow and select <New
Use the auto-complete feature that populates with the nearest match as you type. For example, if
you have a line named 8-300-123 and you want to assign 8-150-124, Type 8 and the box
automatically fills with the first line number that matches what you have typed. Press the <End>
key to change the last character.
..>. The line
number is named Line Number X, where X is a sequential number.


Uniform Loads

This auxiliary screen is used to enter up to three uniform load vectors (load components U1, U2 and U3). These
uniform loads are applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until
explicitly changed or zeroed out with a later entry.

4-20 Piping Input

Wind/Wave

This auxiliary screen is used to specify whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or wave loading.
(Note that the pipe may not be exposed to both.) Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting
Wave exposes the pipe to wave, current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading.
This screen is also used to enter the Wind Shape Factor (when Wind is specified) and various wave coefficients
(if left blank they will be program-computed) when Wave Loading is specified.
Entries on this auxiliary screen apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later spreadsheet.
Note: Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case

Editor.


Allowable Stresses

This auxiliary screen is used to select the piping code (from a drop list) and to enter any data required for the
code check. Allowable stresses are automatically updated for material, temperature and code if available in the
Material Database
Enter
.
Material Fatigue Curve data by clicking the Fatigue Curve button. A dialog displays where users may
enter stress vs. cycle data with up to 8 points per curve.

4-22 Piping Input

Note:
The Fatigue Curve data may also be read in from a Intergraph CAS-supplied or user-created file. Users can
access these file by clicking the
IGE/TD/12 requires the entry of five fatigue curves representing fatigue classes D, E, F, G, and
W.
Read from Files button on the Fatigue Curve dialog.


Stress Intensification Factors/Tees

This auxiliary screen is used to enter stress intensification factors, or fitting types for up to two nodes per
spreadsheet. If components are selected from the drop list, CAESAR II

automatically calculates the SIF values as
per the applicable code (unless overridden by the user). Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data
as shown. Fields are enabled as appropriate for the selected fitting.

4-24 Piping Input

Flexible Nozzles

This auxiliary screen is used to describe flexible nozzle connections. When entered using this dialog, CAESAR II
automatically calculates the flexibilities and inserts them at this location. CAESAR II

calculates nozzle loads
according to WRC 297, API 650 or BS 5500 criteria.


Hangers

This auxiliary screen is used to describe hanger installations. Hanger data may be fully completed by the user, or
the hanger may be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run, the results of which are
used as design parameters which are used to select the springs from the user specified catalog.
Note: CAESAR II

provides catalogs for over 25 different spring hanger vendors.

4-26 Piping Input

Node Names

Activating this check box allows the user to enter text names for the From and/or To nodes (up to ten
characters). These names display instead of the node numbers on the graphic plots and in the reports (note some
of the names may be truncated when space is not available).


Offsets

This auxiliary screen is used to specify offsets to correct modeled element length and orientation to actual length
and orientation. Offsets may be specified at From and/or To nodes.

4-28 Piping Input

Menu Commands
The CAESAR II Piping Input

processor provides many commands, which can be run from the menu, toolbars
or accelerator keys. The menu options are:
File Menu
The File menu is used to perform actions associated with opening, closing and running the job file.

File Menu for the Piping I nput Screen
New
Creates a new CAESAR II job. CAESAR II prompts for the name of the new model.
Open
Opens an existing CAESAR II job. CAESAR II prompts for the name
Save
Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.
Save As Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.
Save As Graphic Image Saves the current CAESAR II job as an HTML page, .TIFF, .BMP, or .J PG file.
Archive
Allows the user to assign a password to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or
to enter the password to unlock the file.
Error Check
Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis,
followed by the building of the static or dynamic load cases (see Chapter 6).


Batch Run
Error checks the model in a non-interactive way and halts only for fatal errors; uses the
existing or default static load cases, and performs the static analysis). The next step is
the output processor.
Print
Allows the user to print out an input listing. CAESAR II prompts the user for the data
items to include.
Print Preview
Provides print preview of input listing.
Print Setup Sets up the printer for the input listing.
Recent Piping Files Open a file from the list of most recently used jobs.

4-30 Piping Input

Edit Menu

Edit Menu for the Piping I nput
The Edit menu provides commands for cutting and pasting, navigating through the spreadsheets, and performing
a few small utilities.
Continue
Moves the spreadsheet to the next element in the model, adding a new element if there
is no next element.
Duplicate
Copies the selected element either before or after the current element.


Duplicate Element
Insert Inserts an element either before or after the current element.

I nsert Element

Delete
Deletes the current element.

4-32 Piping Input

Find
Allows the user to find an element containing one or more named nodes (if two nodes are
entered, the element must contain both nodes). Enabling theZoom To check box will
display the element if found.

Find Element

Global
Prompts the user to enter global (absolute) coordinates for the first node of any
disconnected segments.
close Loop
Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes on the spreadsheet.
Increment
Gives the user the opportunity to change the automatic node increment.
Distance
Calculates the distance between the origin and a node, or between two nodes.
List
Presents the input data in an alternative, list format that displays a drop down menu where
users can select any list. This provides the benefit of showing all of the element data in a
context setting. The list format also permits block operations such as Duplicate, Delete,
Copy, Renumber on the element data. For more information on the list input format, see
the Technical Reference Manual.


List I nput Format

Next Element
Skips to the Next Element.
Previous Element
Goes to the Previous Element.
First Element
Goes to the First Element.
Last Element
Goes to the Last Element.

4-34 Piping Input

Undo

Reverses/Cancels any modeling steps done in the CAESAR II Input module one at a
time. This can also be accomplished by using the he Ctrl-Z hot key or selecting
Edit/Undo from the Main
Note that making any input change while in the middle of the "undo stack" of course
resets the "redo" stack.
Menu. An unlimited number of steps (limited only by
amount of available memory) may be undone.
Redo
Repeats the last step. An unlimited number of steps (limited only by amount of
available memory) may be undone. Note that making any input change while in the
middle of the "undo stack" of course resets the "redo" stack.
Note that making any input change while in the middle of the "undo stack" of course
resets the "redo" stack.

Edit Static Load Case
Opens the Static Load Case Editor window. This button is enabled when the job is
error checked.

Edit Dynamic Load
Case
Opens the Dynamic Load Case Editor window. This button is enabled when the job
is error checked.
Review Current Units Located on theEdit Menu it allows users to review units used to create the report file.
Changing units in the configuration file will not affect the input. To change Input
units from the Main Menu use Tools-Convert Input to New Units.


Model Menu
The Model menu contains modeling aids, as well as means for entering associated, system-wide information.

Model Menu
Break
Allows you to break the element into two unequal length elements or into many equal
length elements. A single node may be placed as a break point anywhere along the
element, or multiple nodes may be placed at equal intervals the node step interval
between the FROM and TO nodes determines the number of nodes placed.
Break

Break Element
Note: Restraint configurations may be automatically copied from any other node in the system to the
new nodes.

4-36 Piping Input

Valve
Allows you to model a valve or flange from one of the CAESAR II databases. Choosing a
combination of Rigid Type, End Type, Class and insertion point constructs a rigid element
with the length and weight extracted from the database.

Valve and Flange Database
Note: Selecting FLG in theCADWORX database adds the length and weight of two flanges (and two
gaskets) into the selected valve.
Expansion J oints
Activates the Expansion Joint Modeler which automatically builds a complete assembly of
the selected expansion joint style, using the bellows stiffnesses and rigid element weights
extracted from the vendors expansion joint catalogs.

Expansion J oints


Title
Allows the user to enter a job title up to sixty lines long.

Title
Hanger Design Control Data
Prompts the user for system - wide hanger design criteria.

Hanger Design Control Data
Note:

System-wide hanger design criteria are used for all hanger designs unless overruled at specific
hanger locations.

4-38 Piping Input

Environment Menu
TheEnvironment menu provides some miscellaneous items.

Environment Menu

Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes
Allows the user to run what if tests on the Stress Intensification Factors of
intersections.

Review SIFs at Bend Nodes
Allows the user to run what if tests on the Stress Intensification Factors of
selected bends.

Special Execution Parameters
Allows the user to set options affecting the analysis of the current job. Items
covered include ambient temperature, pressure stiffening, displacements due to
pressure (Bourdon effect), Z-axis orientation, etc.


Special Execution Parameters
Include Piping Input FilesAllows the user to include other piping models in the current model.

I nclude Piping Files
The same file may be included more than once by highlighting it in the list, then changing the rotation angle
(ROTY) or nodal increment (Inc) before clicking Add.

4-40 Piping Input

Include Structural Input FilesAllows the incorporation of structural models into the piping model.

I nclude Structural Files
Show Informational
Messages
Allows the user to specify whether or not you receive information messages when
CAESAR II converts nominal diameter and thicknesses to actual diameter and
thicknesses.
Reset View or
Refresh
Allows users to control the way graphics behave when adding new or modifying
existing elements.

CAESAR II
Configuration
Opens the configuration file for review and editing.
Options and View

menu choices list graphic controls and manipulation commands.


Tools Menu
The Tools menu enables users to reset the toolbar, display a list of mini windows, and import and/or export
displacements.

Tools Menu for the Piping I nput Screen

Reset Toolbar Layout Sets Toolbars to the default layout.
Mini-windows
Provides a list of mini-windows for data
input.
Import/Export Displacements
from File
Import/Export nodal displacements from/to
a text or an Excel file.

Clicking the Import/Export Displacements from File menu option displays the Import/Export Displacements
dialog.

4-42 Piping Input

Exporting Displacements To A File
To export nodal displacements to a file:
1 Type the path and name of a displacement file in the text box or select the path and name of a
displacement file by clicking theBrowse
2 Click
button.
Export
3 Click
to send the nodal displacements to the selected file.
Done to exit theImport/Export Displacements dialog.
Note: If there are no displacements in a CAESAR II
Importing Displacements From A File
job an export operation creates a displacement
template file in which all nodes are listed according to the element list.
To import nodal displacements from a file:
1 Type the path and name of the displacement file, or select a displacement file by clicking the
Browse button. The Open dialog displays.

Two file formats can be used to create a displacement file:
Fixed format with a .disp file extension.
Commas Separated Value format with a .csv file extension.
By default, displacement files display in comma separated values format(.csv).
Users can also choose displacement files with the fixed format (.disp) by clicking Displacement Import File
(*.dsp) from the Files of type box, as displayed below:


2 Browse the folders to search and then select the appropriate displacement file.
3 Open the selected file by either double-clicking the file name or clicking Open
4 Click
.
Import. During the import process, if an erroneous condition is detected for a displacement
node a warning messages will display. Finally, a summary report is generated after all displacement
data is processed. The Import/Export Displacements dialog may resemble the dialog below after
importing a displacement file to a CAESAR II model.

For more details about warning messages and the summary report, refer to the Importing an Exporting
Displacements of Auxiliary Fields Imposed Loads section, in the Piping Screen Reference chapter. After

4-44 Piping Input

reviewing warning messages and a summary report, users can exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog
by clicking Done The first two screen captures show what displacement files look like in Notepad for both disp
and csv formats. The third and fourth screen captures show what displacement files in Microsoft Excel. For a
detailed description of both file formats, refer to the Importing and Exporting Displacements of Auxiliary Fields
Imposed Loads section.

Notepad Example (*.disp) format

Notepad Example (*.csv) format

Excel Example (*.csv) format
If a CAESAR II job has no displacements the displacement export operation creates a displacement template
file as shown below.


Excel Example (*.csv) format Displacement File Template

4-46 Piping Input

3-D Modeler

Start CAESAR II and launch the Piping Input Processor. Once in the input, the graphic automatically plots and
displays to the right of the Classic Piping Input window. To increase the window space available for graphics
the Classic Piping Input
A rendered view- restraints shown
window may be hidden from view on the side panel by clicking the thumbtack. The
initial view for a job never plotted before is displayed according to the configuration defaults that include:
XYZ compass - isometric view
Tees and nozzles highlighted- orthographic projection
The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the process. Then all the
elements get changed to their intended state (they are rendered one by one). Later, the restraints and other
relevant items are added.
Note: The model is fully operational while actually being drawn. You can apply any available option
to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in the form of
Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete the status message changes to Ready.


When the mouse cursor hovers over the buttons the button's name displays, and a short description of the
buttons functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.
There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot Utility. Commands may be
accessed by clicking buttons, selecting drop-down menu items, or through the use of hot keys.
Center Line
View
Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view
clearer, click this button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element
information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained by
clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will switch
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode /
Center Line View.
Shaded View
clearer, click the Center Line View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other
element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained
by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will
switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line
Mode / Center Line View.
Silhouette

Hidden Line Wire
Frame

Wire Frame
Translucent

4-48 Piping Input

Front
Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button,
Front/Back/Top Bottom/ Left/Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the
keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally,
holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or
back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen
on a CAD drawing.
Back
Front/Back/Top/ Bottom/ Left/Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the
on a CAD drawing.
Top
Front/Back/Top/Bottom Left/Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the
on a CAD drawing.
Bottom
Front/Back/Top/Bottom/Left/ Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the
on a CAD drawing.
Left
on a CAD drawing.
Right
on a CAD drawing.
ISO View
Displays an isometric view this option may be activated by pressing the F10 key on the
keyboard.
Node Numbers
Displays Node numbers by clicking the Node Numbers button, by pressing the N key
on or by clicking OPTIONS/NODE NUMBERS from then menu. Users can also opt to display
node numbers for a specific element i.e., only restraints or only anchors.


Show Length
Displays element lengths by clicking the Show Lengths button or by pressing theL key
on the keyboard. Alternatively, the same functionality can be achieved from the menu
by clicking OPTIONS/LENGTHS. This will display the elements lengths to verify the input.
Select Element
Select Element and using the mouse to hover over the model produces a bubble
displaying relevant information for the desired element. For more information refer to
the 3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads
section later in this chapter.
Select Group
Select Group and using the mouse to hover over the model produces a bubble
displaying relevant information for the desired group of elements. For more information
refer to the 3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads,
Wind/Wave Loads section later in this chapter.
Perspective
The transition from one orthogonal view to another is a smooth transition. It is possible
to make a sudden change/jump by pressing a combination of the CTRL +ALT +F5
keys before changing the view with one of the described options. The sudden jump
option is useful for relatively large models as it speeds up the viewing process.
Orthographic
The transition from one orthogonal view to another is a smooth transition. It is possible
to make a sudden change/jump by pressing a combination of the CTRL +ALT +F5
keys before changing the view with one of the described options. The sudden jump
option is useful for relatively large models as it speeds up the viewing process.
Note: For a clearer view, nodes, restraints, hangers, and anchors can be turned off. The boundary
condition symbols (like restraints, anchors, and hangers} size is relative to the pipe size OD. In addition
the symbol (i.e., restraints and/or hangers) size may be changed manually by clicking the black arrow
to the right of the relevant button and selecting the Size
Users can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, etc. by clicking the
option from the drop down menu.
Change Display Options button, for more information refer to the 3D Graphics Configuration section later in
this chapter.

4-50 Piping Input

The model can be panned using the mouse, by activating thePan button. After clicking the button, the cursor
changes to a hand; and the view may be panned by moving the mouse while holding down the left mouse button.
The view may also be panned from under any other command by holding down the middle mouse button/mouse
wheel while moving the mouse (when applicable).
Reset Plot
All the highlighting and zoom/rotate effects on the model as well as other effects may
be reset at once by clicking this button. The model returns to its default state as defined
by the configuration; any elements hidden by the Range command are restored, for
more information refer to the Range section for details.
Zoom
The model can be zoomed by clicking the Zoom button, and moving the mouse up or
down while depressing the left mouse button. Releasing the mouse button halts the
zoom. Note that while in the zoom mode, the keyboard + and - keys may be used to
zoom the model in and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from under
any other command or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best
way to zoom to a particular area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band
box around the desired area.
Zoom to Window
Simply click theZoom to Window
Note that while in the zoom mode, the keyboard
button, then left-click one corner of the desired
area, and stretch a box diagonally to the opposite corner of the area while still holding
the left mouse button down. When the left button is released, the model zooms to the
selected area.
+ and - keys may be used to zoom the
model in and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from under any other
command or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best way to zoom
to a particular area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band box around
the desired area.
Zoom to
Selection
To see a specific element on the model on the screen click this button.
Zoom to Extents
To see the entire model on the screen, click the Zoom to Extents button. Note that
while in the zoom mode, the keyboard + and - keys may be used to zoom the model in
and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from under any other command
or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best way to zoom to a
particular area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band box around the
desired area.


Orbit
Interactive rotation of the model can be accomplished by clicking theOrbit button.
Once this mode is activated, rotate the model by using the mouse or the arrow keys on
the keyboard. To use a mouse for rotating the model, click the left mouse button on the
model (the bounding box will be drawn to outline the model boundaries; while holding
down the left mouse button, move the mouse around to the desired position. When the
mouse button is released, the view is updated and the bounding box disappears. If the
bounding box is not visible, check the corresponding box on theUser Options tab of
the Plot Configuration
Another method of orbiting the model is the Gyro-operator. Activate this feature by
pressing the
dialog for more information refer to the 3D Graphics
Configuration section for details. Note, during rotation operation (only for speedup
purposes) the model may be changed to the centerline/ single line mode view or some of
the geometry details may disappear or become distorted. The actual conversion will
depend on the size and complexity of the model. Once the rotation is complete, the
model returns to its original state.
G key. After pressing theG key, the model performs a full 360-degree
rotation in the plane of view.
Pan
Holding the mouse wheel down and moving the mouse up, down, left, or right, provides
the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to the side, similar to
using the keyboard keys Q, Z, A, or D. The mouse cursor will change to a hand icon.
Walk Through
Enables users to explore the scene of the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality
application. It produces the effect of walking towards the model
Load
CADWorx Model
Displays the model in CADWorx.

4-52 Piping Input

3D Graphics Configuration
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics
To obtain a more uniform look of graphics users may change the color and font options under
engine remembers the state of the model between sessions. Exiting the input
completely and then returning to the input graphics results in the model being displayed in the same state in
which it was last viewed.
TOOLS/CONFIGURE/SETUP/3D VIEWER SETTINGS. Check the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System
Colors boxes located under the Default Visual Settings section. These settings will then be stored in the
computer's registry and CAESAR II will always display the graphics according to these settings.

If the check boxes described above are unchecked then the state of each model is maintained individually (job
related), as an XML data file (jobname.XML) in the current data directory. After launching another input
session, CAESAR II
Most of the display options can be adjusted by clicking the
reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes the
rotation and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics operator.
Change button. The tabs of the Plot Configuration
dialog control include: basic graphics colors, font selection and size for textural data, user startup settings, and
visibility (the degree of transparency.


Option Description
Colors Selecting any item in the list, then clicking Change, displays a Windows color selection
tool. Selecting the desired color and clicking OK changes the color of the selected item
to the new color. The rotating spring hanger is used to actively view the color selection
combinations before altering the entire plot window. Use this tool to prevent selecting
unsatisfactory color combinations. Colors may be reset to CAESAR II defaults, as defined
in configuration, by clicking Reset All.
Fonts Selecting any item in the list, then clicking Change, displays the standard Windows
font selection tool. Making the desired changes and clicking OK updates the selected
item. Similar to the Colors tab, the relative size, color, as well as the font face of the
selected text item can be previewed in the Font Sample window of the Fonts tab before
changing the entire model.

4-54 Piping Input

User Options
Specifies the initial display configuration when plotting a model in an input session. The 3D Graphics can be
configured (on an individual job basis) to restart in a specific manner. The graphics can start with a preset
operator active (such as zoom with mouse), or start with the last operator used still active. Likewise, the graphics
can start in a preset view (such as isometric), or in the last rotated zoomed position.

Option Description
Bounding Box Determines if rotations, via the mouse, includes an outline box surrounding the model.
Hide Overlapped
Text
Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items thereby producing a distortion.
Restore Last Operator Determines whether the graphics engine remembers your last action (operator) between
sessions or always defaults to a specified action (operator) on startup. Disabling the
check box activates the Operator Selection radio buttons.
Restore Previous
View
Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed view of the
model, or defaults to a specified view. Disabling the check box activates the Initial
View radio buttons.
Default Projection Determines the initial projection style of the model. CAESAR II Graphics automatically
default to orthographic projection.
Visibility Alters the degree of transparency, when translucent pipe is activated. When the
Translucent Objects button is enabled, it allows viewing through the pipe. This is
especially useful for viewing jacketed piping or piping inside of vessels. Moving the
slider to the right increases the degree of visibility, making it easier to see through the
pipe elements.


Note: TheVisibility option is only effective when viewing the model in rendered mode, and can be
activated by clicking the Translucent Objects button.
Option Description
Markers Displays a symbol denoting the elements end points.

Note: Clicking OK on the Plot Configuration dialog saves all changes made to any tab and modifies
the models view. Clicking Cancel

will disregard all changes made.

4-56 Piping Input

HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations
HOOPS Graphics also provides the ability to adjust the graphics toolbar for the purpose of rearranging or
removing buttons. There are two methods to make these adjustments, the first method is to right click on the
toolbar and click Customize
To remove buttons from the toolbar click the down arrow located at the end of each toolbar and then click
. The second method involves removing or repositioning the button using the drag
and drop method.
Remove. To add button removed from the toolbar by clicking the down arrow and clicking Add. To rearrange
buttons select them, one at a time, while pressing the ALT key and then drag it to the desired location. To restore
the CAESAR II default toolbar configuration, click the Reset
In addition to the use of the
button.
Customize button, individual buttons can be removed or repositioned by pressing
the ALT
Multiple View Ports
key, and dragging the desired button. To remove a button, drag it off the graphics window, using the
left mouse button. To reposition a button, drag it to the desired location, using the left mouse button. When the
mouse button is released, the button will be placed on the toolbar at the selected location.
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics module provides up to 4 views, which can be sized, rotated, and annotated
individually by the user.
Four Views
Enables manipulation of model by users provides up to 4 views, which can
be sized, rotated, and annotated individually by the user.
To control the splitter handle, click the Four Views
The vertical and horizontal splitter bars can also be dragged or resized individually: after hovering the mouse
over a splitter bar, the mouse cursor will change to vertical or horizontal resize correspondingly. For example, to
change the position of the vertical split bar, using the left mouse button, grab the splitter bar and drag it to the
right. When the mouse button is released, all the panes are updated. If the splitter bar is dragged to the view
frame border, it disappears, and the number of views is decreased in half. This is true for both the horizontal and
vertical splitter bars. When the last splitter bar is dragged away to the view frame border, the single view is left.
It is also possible to drag from the intersection of the horizontal and vertical dividers to any corner of the view to
eliminate 3 views at once.
button. It automatically places the horizontal and vertical
dividers (splitter bars on the screen, and changes the mouse cursor to a four-way arrow icon. You can change the
position of the splitter bars (and correspondingly the relative size of the views by moving the mouse around.
After finding the desired location, click the left mouse button once to fix the position.
Another way to divide the view into two or four independent views is to drag the splitter located at the top or left
scroll bars with the mouse. Notice the two splitter bars at the graphics processor window, one is at the far left of
the horizontal scroll bar, and the other is at the very top of the vertical scroll bar. Using the left mouse button,
grab the lower left splitter bar and drag it to the right. The graphics window splits into two panes, left and right.
When the mouse button is released, both panes are updated. Again using the left mouse button, grab the upper
right splitter bar and drag it down. The two existing panes split into two additional panes, upper and lower.
When the mouse button is released, all four panes are updated, with the X axis view in the upper left pane, the Y
axis view in the upper right pane, the Z axis view in the lower left pane, and a isometric (or original) view in the
lower right pane.
Note:

The image in any of these panes can be manipulated individually. Each pane can be rotated,
panned, or zoomed independently of the other panes.


3D Graphic Highlights: Diameters, Wall, Insulation, Cladding & Refractory Thickness, Materials, Piping Codes
Often it is necessary to review the piping model in the context of certain data, for example, by diameter, wall
thickness, temperature, or pressure. These operations are illustrated below.
Diameters
When Diameters is clicked, the display updates to show each diameter in a different
color. A color key (legend) is included at the bottom of the plot in its own pane. This
option can be used to quickly see the diameter variations throughout the system. This
option is a good way to verify that diameter changes have been made where appropriate.
The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the
Diameters menu options. Alternatively, users may press the D- key to view different
diameters.
Wall
Thickness
Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is
colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on
the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the
Wall Thickness menu option. Alternatively, the user may use the corresponding user
may press the W- key to view the different wall thicknesses throughout the model.
Insulation
Thickness
Insulation menu options. Alternatively, users may use the corresponding user may press
the I- key to view the insulation. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the Insulation
Thickness button displays the additional thickness choices available: Cladding and
Refractory.
Cladding Thickness Clicking the black arrow to the right of the Insulation Thickness button displays the
additional thickness choices available: Cladding and Refractory. Produces results
similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to
the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same
functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Cladding
Thickness option.
Refractory
Thickness
Clicking the black arrow to the right of theInsulation Thickness button displays the
additional thickness choices available: Cladding and Refractory. Produces results
similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to
the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same
functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting theRefractory
Thickness option
Materials
Materials menu option. Alternatively, users may press the M - key to view different
materials.

4-58 Piping Input

Piping Codes
Piping Codes menu options
Note: The legend window may be resized, docked, and/or removed from view.
Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can be used without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Note: Clicking the same button twice will deactivate the coloring effect.
Note: The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting Materials, Piping Codes,
Diameters, Wall Thickness, or Insulation Thickness menu options. Alternatively, the user may use the
corresponding keyboard keys: M - to view different materials, D - to view different diameters, W - to view
different wall thicknesses throughout the model, and I - to view the insulation.
Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/ PRINT

while in one of the highlighted modes
described herein, the color key legend will appear in the upper left corner of the page. This is always
true, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.
3D Graphics Highlights: Corrosion and Densities
Often it is necessary to review the piping model in the context of certain data, for example, by corrosion
allowance, pipe, fluid, insulation, cladding or refractory density, or Insulation Cladding/Unit Weight. These
operations are explained below.
Button Description
Corrosion
Allowance
Enables you to see the Corrosion Allowance. The model is colored according to the
different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same
functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting theCorrosion
Allowance option
Pipe Density
Enables you to see the Pipe Density. The model is colored according to the different data
defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be
achieved from the Options menu by selecting thePipe Density option
Fluid Density
Enables you to see the Fluid Density. Produces results similar to the ones described in the
Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the
corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from
the Options menu by selecting the Fluid Density option.


Button Description
Insulation
Density
Enables you to see the Insulation Density. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the
Insulation Density button displays the additional density choices available: Cladding,
Refractory and Insulation Cladding/Unit Weight. Produces results similar to the ones
described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data
defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be
achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Insulation Density option
Cladding Density Enables you to see the Cladding Density. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the
Insulation Density button displays the additional density choices available: Cladding
and Refractory. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section,
the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend
appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by
selecting theCladding Density option.
Refractory Density Enables you to see the Refractory Density. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the
Insulation Density button displays the additional density choices available: Cladding
and Refractory. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section,
the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend
appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by
selecting theRefractory Density option
Insulation/Cladding
Unit Weight
Enables you to see the Insulation/Cladding Unit Weight. Clicking the black arrow to the
right of theInsulation Density button displays the additional density choices available:
Cladding, Refractory and Insulation/Cladding Unit Weight. Produces results similar to the
ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different
data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality
may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting theInsulation/Cladding Unit
Weight option

Note: The legend window may be resized, docked, and/or removed from view.
Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can be used without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Note: Clicking the same button twice deactivates the coloring effect.
Note: You can achieve the same functionality from the Options menu by selecting the Corrosion
Allowance, Piping Density, Fluid Density, Insulation Density, Cladding Density Refractory
Density or Insulation/Cladding Unit Weight
Alternatively, you may use the corresponding keyboard keys: M - to view different materials, D - to view
different diameters, W - to view different wall thicknesses throughout the model, and I - to view the insulation.
menu options.
Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/ PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes
described herein, the color key legend will appear in the upper left corner of the page. This is always
true, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.

4-60 Piping Input

3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics engine can display applied/predefined displacements, forces, uniform loads, or
wind/wave loads in tabular format. You can scroll the display windows vertically and or horizontally to view all
node points where data has been defined. To flip through the defined displacement or force vectors 1 through 9,
use the Next and Previous
The displacements window shows the user-specified values as well as free or fixed Degrees of Freedom (DOF).
In this case, a DOF is free if a displacement value is not specified in any of the displacement load vectors. Note
also that if a certain DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load vectors, then it is fixed in all
other load vectors.
buttons at the bottom of the tabular legend window. The color key at the far left of
the window assists in locating the node points on the model (when the model geometry is complex).
Forces
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics
The model elements are highlighted for a particular force vector, and the color key
legend grid window displays on the left. The node number in combination with a color
key specifies the location where the force and moment values are defined.
displays displacements and /or forces in a tabular format.
Uniform Loads
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The
can display uniform loads in a tabular format.
Node column represents the start node
number where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Since the data propagates
throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave
The color key is defined as follows: all the elements with wind defined are colored in
red color; all the elements with wave data defined are colored in green color. The legend
grid shows the relevant data items defined by the user.
can display wind/wave loads in a tabular format.
Wind/Wave also displays the loading coefficients.

Note: The legend window may be resized, docked and/or removed from the view.
Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can still be used without affecting the
model highlighted state.
Note: Clicking the same button twice deactivates the coloring effect.
Note: You can achieve the same functionality from the Options Menu by selecting the relevant
options. Alternatively, you can access Predefined Displacements by pressing F3 on the keyboard.
Access Forces/moment vectors by pressing F5 on the keyboard.
Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes
described herein, the color key legend appears on the second page following the model bitmap image.
The printed legend is presented in the tabular form similar to the legend window.


Select Element allows you to obtain element data. When enabled, hovering over a pipe element with the
mouse shows a bubble with the element's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe size data. Clicking on an element
highlights the element and updates the information on the spreadsheet. Clicking a different element highlights
the relevant element and changes the data in the spreadsheet accordingly.
Note:

Clicking the empty space of the graphics view de-highlights the element. However, the
spreadsheet will still contain the information from the last element selected.

Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info; Find Node, Range & Cutting Plane
Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of displayed information on the screen. This may be useful when
the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches. There are several ways to achieve this result by
clicking the Find Node, Range, or Cutting Plane button. The description of these operations, their advantages
and disadvantages are illustrated below.
Find Node
Allows redlining based on the user moving the mouse. Find Node is useful
when a specific node or an element needs to be located. Clicking Find Node
displays a dialog prompting for the FROM and TO nodes to search for. The node
numbers can be entered in either of the two fields, or in both. Entering only the
FROM node number causes the feature to search for the first available element
that starts with the specified node number. Entering only the TO node number
causes the feature to search for an element ending with the specified node
number. When the element is located, it is highlighted, and the view zooms to
the element. You can zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted
element within the model.
Create Cutting Plane
Allows redlining using a rectangular shape. This option is also useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements/node
numbers are not defined consecutively. Thus, it may be easier to cut a portion of
the model at a certain location to see more details.
For this operation, use the Create Cutting Plane button. When the cutting plane
appears, use the handles to move and or rotate the plane as desired. If cutting the
plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, the view may be
focused too close for the plane to operate correctly. Use the Zoom button to
zoom out; then click the Cutting Plane
Note the
button again for the handles to appear.
To disable the cutting plane and return to view click on the display with the right
mouse button.
Create Cutting Plane option can be used along any of the three axes.
Horizontally
Allows redlining using a circular shape. This option is useful when trying to
emphasize a specific element. To disable the cutting plane and return to view
click on the display with the right mouse button.
Note the Create Cutting Plane option can be used along any of the three axes.

4-62 Piping Input

Vertically
Allows the user to enter text and place it anywhere in the plot area. To disable
the cutting plane and return to view click on the display with the right mouse
button.
Note the Create Cutting Plane options can be used along any of the three axes.
Range plots only those elements that contain nodes within the range specified by the user. This is particularly
helpful when attempting to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a rather large, often
symmetrical model. Click theRange button or press the U key to display the Range dialog.

A sorted list of all defined node numbers with corresponding check marks appears. Clicking a check box next to
a particular node number will enable or disable it.
Note: Only elements with check marks on will display when OK is clicked. If theRange
Rangeenables the selection and dragging of consecutive node numbers (click the left mouse button on the first
node of the desired selection, then move the mouse while holding the mouse button down, and release the button
at the last node of the desired selection). Alternatively, users may click the first node, press the
option was
previously used, consecutive clicks will display the dialog with the current state of the shown/hidden
elements and the corresponding check marks.
SHIFT
Use the
key and
click the last node of the selection using the mouse button. Clicking the check mark with the rectangle once
toggles the status that is applied to the entire highlighted selection.
FROM and TO fields together with theAdd button to specify and/or add to the range of elements that
are already selected. If only the FROM node is specified and Add is clicked, all elements (from this node and up
will be selected). Clicking theReverse Selection button toggles the check marks for the elements to show: it
displays the previously hidden elements, and hides the previously displayed elements. When Clear All
Note, if none of the elements are selected, and
is
enabled, none of the elements are selected (and the graphics view appears blank). Use this button to clear the
selection.
OK is clicked, the view becomes blank. To show the entire
model, click the Select All button.


Note: Using the Range option affects the display and operation of other 3D Graphics Highlighting
options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the Range option, then
clicking the Show Diameters option will only highlight the elements that are actually visible. Also if
using the Range option hides any nodes containing the predefined displacements, the Displacements
legend grid still appears, but the model may not be properly highlighted.
Note:
Save an Image for Later Presentation: TIF, HTML, BMP, JPEG and PDF
Find Node may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the Range. The
corresponding message will also appear in the status bar.
Occasionally, it is necessary to add a graphical representation of a model to the CAESAR II Stress reports. The
3D/HOOPS Graphics view can be saved as a bitmap by clickingFILE/ SAVE AS GRAPHICS IMAGE. The model
geometry, colors, highlighting, as well as restraints and most of the other options will be transferred to the
bitmap. After clicking Save As Graphics Image theSave Image dialog appears asking the user to specify the
desired file name and a directory for the file to be saved. The default bitmap file name is the job name with an
extension .TIF. (This is a standard, Windows supported image file extension that can be opened for viewing.)
The image resolution can also be changed in the Save Image dialog.
Note:
Due to certain limitations of the
This is a static bitmap file.
3D/HOOPS
You now have the option to save the graphics as .HTML file. After saving as .HTML
modeler, the legend window and text cannot be saved to the
bitmap. However, all coloring, as well as the annotations and markups are successfully saved.
CAESAR II
Note this is an interactive file.
creates two
files in the current data directory using the current job name: *.HTML and *.HSF. Opening the .HTML file
should display the corresponding .HSF file.
The first time a CAESAR II created .HTML file is opened with an Internet browser, the user receives a message
asking to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. Answer Yes to allow the download, and the image will be
displayed. Once the model appears, selecting and right-clicking the model shows the available viewing options,
such as orbit, pan, zoom, different render modes, etc. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard as
necessary.
Note:

Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly, we
recommend IE6 or later.
Annotations
Used to highlight a problem area, or write a brief description of the model. The
annotation may be especially useful in the output processor for more information
refer to the discussion at the end of this section.
The CAESAR II 3D/HOOPS Graphics
When the
processor provides several types of annotation as discussed below.
Annotate Model button is clicked, the annotation text box with a leader line to an element is added to

4-64 Piping Input

the graphics view. To add the annotation, click with the left mouse button on a particular element to start the
leader line, while holding the mouse button down drag the leader line to the annotation point, then type in the
annotation text, and then press the Enter key.
Note: The annotation text box is only a single line.
Note: Annotation with leader stays with the model on zoom, pan, rotate, and use of any highlight
options. Annotation also gets printed to the printer and saved to the bitmap. Annotations are not saved
to the HTML file.
Note: The color and font face/size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Change Display
Options
Other annotation options are listed below:
, for more information refer to the 3D Graphics Configuration section in this chapter.
Freehand Markup
Operator
Allows redlining based on the user moving the mouse.
Rectangle Markup
Allows redlining using a rectangular shape. This option is useful when trying to
emphasize a specific element
Circle Markup
Allows redlining using a circular shape. This option is useful when trying to
emphasize a specific element
Annotate Operator
Allows the user to enter text and place it anywhere in the plot area.
It may be used to add a short description of the model to the graphics image for printing or saving as a bitmap.
Note: This markup annotation text box is only a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed the default color is red.
Note: Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
Note:

The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary; they are not saved with the
model, and disappear from view with any change like zoom, rotate, pan or reset all.
3D Graphics Interactive Feature: Walk Through
CAESAR II enables users to explore the scene of the model with a feature similar in operation to a virtual reality
game. It produces the effect of walking towards the model; and once close to or inside the model users can look
left, right, up, and down, step to a side, or ride an elevator up and down. Walk is useful in providing a real-time
interactive view of the model. Click Walk Through , to enables this feature. After clicking Walk Through
Walking Around
the mouses cursor displays as a pair of feet.
Users can begin walking by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Move forward by moving the mouse
toward the top of the window, back by doing the opposite.


Walk Through also provides an additional control that aids in navigation. Clicking the various hot
spots
In addition
on the control duplicates mouse movements with the added benefit of providing the ability to move in a
perfectly straight line.
Walk Through also provides users with the added functionality of determining the walking speed. In
general, walking speed is determined by the distance between where you first click and how far you move the
mouse. The keys below which, if held down while walking, effect walk through's operation:
<Shift> - Changes the walk mode to run mode, effectively doubling the walk speed.
<Ctrl> - Changes the walk mode to slow mode, effectively halving the walk speed.
<Alt> - Enables users to look left or right without changing the walk path. Releasing the key, automatically
returns your viewpoint to looking
To exit from this option, click any other operator.
forward.
Resizing Models
The Resize Geometry button enables you to change the geometry of the model.
Resizing a Model
1. Click this button and the marker control point appears at all nodes and every tangent
point (on bends, it displays on the far weld-line).
2. Left-click and rubber band the nodes you want to move.
3. Release the button, then place the cursor (the arrow) on any one of the selected nodes.
4. Click the left node button down and up to place the mouse is in move mode
5. The mouse movement will be clamped to either the x, y, or z axis. To change the axis use
the
.
[TAB] key or click 1 of theAxis buttons on this same toolbar. Another left-click
sets the new location and the model geometry is updated. Alternatively, you can enter
the magnitude of the desired movement. If a single number is entered, the movement
will be applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple directions at
once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.

Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases
In This Chapter
Error Checking ...................................................................... 5-2
Static Load Case Editor......................................................... 5-6
Building Static Load Cases ................................................... 5-8
Providing Wind Data ............................................................ 5-15
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters.................................. 5-17
Execution of Static Analysis ................................................. 5-18
Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases ........................................ 5-20

C H A P T E R 5

5-2 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Error Checking
Static analysis cannot be performed until the error checking portion of the piping preprocessor has been
successfully completed. Only after error checking is completed are the required analysis data files created.
Similarly, any subsequent changes made to the model input are not reflected in the analysis unless error checking
is rerun after those changes have been made. CAESAR II does not allow an analysis to take place if the input has
been changed and not successfully error checked.
Button Description

Error Checking can only be done from the input spreadsheet, and is initiated by executing
the
Error Check
Error Check or Batch Run commands from the toolbar or menu. Error Check saves the
input and starts the error checking procedure.

Batch Run causes the program to check the input data, analyze the system, and present the
results without any user interaction. The assumptions are that the loading cases to be
analyzed do not need to change and that the default account number (if accounting active) is
correct. These criteria are usually met after the first pass through the analysis. Batch
processing focuses the users attention on the creation of input and the review of output by
expediting the steps in between.
Batch Run
Once launched, the Error Checker reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts users to any possible errors,
inconsistencies, or noteworthy items. These items display to users as Errors, Warnings, or Notes in a grid. The
total number of errors, warnings, or notes displays in corresponding text fields above the Message Grid. Users
may sort messages in the Message Grid by type, message number, or element/node number by double-clicking
the corresponding column header. Users can also print messages displayed in the Message Grid by clicking
FILE/PRINT.


Fatal Error Message
Errors are flagged when there is a problem with the model due to analysis that cannot continue. An example of
this would be if no length were defined for a piping element. These errors are also called fatal errors, since they
are fatal to the analysis, and must be corrected before continuing.
Clicking on the error message will move the spreadsheet display to the offending element. Users can change the
view between the spreadsheet and error warning views using the tabs located at the bottom of the window.
.


Warning Message
Warnings are flagged whenever there is a problem with a model, which can be overcome using some
assumptions. An example of this would be if the wall thickness of an element were insufficient to meet the
minimum wall thickness for the given pressure (hoop stress). Warnings need not be corrected to get a successful
analysis, but users should review all warnings carefully as they are displayed.


Note Message
The third category of alert is the informational note. These messages inform the user of some noteworthy fact
related to the model. An example of a note may be a message informing the user of the number of hangers to be
designed by CAESAR II. For notes, there is nothing for the user to correct.


Static Load Case Editor
The first step in the analysis of an error-checked piping model is the specification of the static load cases.
Button Description
Analysis
Statics
Selection of the Analysis-Static option from the CAESAR II Main Menu or from within
the piping input invokes the Load Case Editor.
Note: The piping input file must have successfully gone through error checking before this
option can be chosen.
A discussion of CAESAR II Load Cases
After entering the
is included at the end of this chapter. Please refer to that section for
more information.
Static Load Case Editor, a screen appears which lists all of the available loads that are
defined in the input, the available stress types, and the current load cases offered for analysis. If the job is
entering static analysis for the first time, CAESAR II presents a list of recommended load cases. If the job has
been run previously, the loads shown are those saved during the last session. A typical Load Case Editor screen
displays below:

Load Case Editor
You can define up to 999 load cases. Load cases may be edited by clicking on a line in the Load List
Only the load components listed in the upper left-hand portion of the screen may be specified in the load cases.
area.


The entries must be identical to what is shown on the screen. Available stress types can be selected from the
Stress Type
Load Cases may be built through drag and drop actions. Dragging a load component from the
menu. Stress type determines the stress calculation method and the allowable stress to use (if any).
Loads Defined in
Input list to a line on the load list automatically adds the load component to the load case, if it is not already
included. Highlighted basic load cases may be dragged down to be added to algebraic combination cases
(CAESAR II may prompt for combination type). Use the Load Case Options tab to select combination methods
and other specifics pertaining to the load cases.
Note:
All basic (non-combination) load sets must all be specified before any algebraic combinations may be declared.
This rule holds true for user defined and edited load cases.
Defining a fatigue (FAT) stress type for a load case automatically displays a field in which the
number of anticipated load cycles for that load case can be entered.
The following commands are available on this screen:
Button Description
Edit-Insert
Inserts a blank load case following the currently selected line in the load list. If no line is
selected, the load case is added at the end of the list. Load cases are selected by clicking on
the number to the left of the load case.
Edit-Delete
Deletes the currently selected load case.
File Analysis
Accepts the load cases and runs the job.
Recommend

Allows the user to replace the current load cases with the CAESAR II recommended load
cases.
Load Cycles

Hides or displays theLoad Cycles field in the Load Case list. Entries in these fields are
only valid for load cases defined with the fatigue stress type.
Import Load Cases

Copies the load cases from another file. The units and load types of the copied file must
match those of the current file.

Note: To add a new load case to the beginning of currently defined load cases, click on the blank line
in the load list just above L1. Then click the Edit-Insert

button.


Building Static Load Cases
Load Case Definition in CAESAR II
TheCAESAR II Load Case Editor is a versatile instrument for combining native and combination loads in nearly
any manner required by the various piping codes supported by CAESAR II. To enter the Static Load Case
Editor from the CAESAR II Main Menu select ANALYSIS->STATICS
The Technical Reference Manual describes the method for adding or deleting load cases. Here we will
concentrate on which load cases to use to describe a variety of situations. For assistance in load case definition
for an application not covered here, or for clarification of the load cases described below, please contact ICAS
Technical Support by e-mail at caesarii@intergraph.com.
.
Standard Load Cases for B31.1, B31.3, ASME SECT III Class 2 & 3, NAVY 505, B31.4, B31.5, B31.8, B31.9,
B31.11, Canadian Z662, RCC-M C & D, Stoomwezen, CODETI, Norwegian, FDBR, BS 806 piping codes
display below:
Use these load cases (as recommended by CAESAR II
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
) for cases where you have weight, temperature, and
pressure.
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
L3 L1-L2 (EXP) *
* For the expansion case use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
Note:
The expansion case is a combination case that results from subtracting the sustained case from the operating
case. As such the expansion case represents the change in the piping system due to the effect of temperature, but
in the presence of other loads. This is important because the restraint status of the operating and sustained cases
can be different if there are nonlinear restraints (such as +Y, -Z, any restraint with a gap, etc.) or boundary
conditions (friction).
Some of the above piping codes perform a code stress check on the operating case and some do
not. For more information, refer to the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for the equations used for
obtaining code stress and allowable stress for the various piping codes.
The Standard Load Cases for B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DNV codes display below:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
No expansion stress is calculated for these piping codes.
The Standard Load Cases for BS7159 and UKOOA piping codes display below:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
No expansion or sustained stress is calculated for these piping codes.


Load Cases with Hanger Design
When CAESAR II designs spring hangers, two additional load cases are required as recommended by
CAESAR II
L1 W (HGR) *HS =Rigid
. The letter H is used to designate the hanger installation load (pre-load) that is always present in a
spring hanger.
L2 W+T1+P1 (HGR) *HS =Ignore
L3 W+T1+P1+H (OPE) *HS =As Designed
L4 W+P1+H (SUS) *HS =As Designed
L5 L3-L4 (EXP) **
*HS is the Hanger Stiffness defined under the Load Case Options
** Use the algebraic combination method under the
tab.
Load Case Options
When using only pre-defined spring hangers, there is no need for the first two load cases above, however, the
letter H is still required in the operating and sustained load cases. When using multiple load case design other
hanger load cases are required. In such instances it is suggested that the user first allow
tab.
CAESAR II

to
recommend the load cases, then add/edit the non-hanger design load cases as appropriate.
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements
Generally, thermal displacements are associated with specific operating conditions (D1 is applied with T1, D2
with T2 and son on. When one temperature is below ambient, and one is above ambient we will want to
determine the full expansion stress range as described below:
L1 W+T1+D1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T2+D2+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) * effects of D1 and T1
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) * effects of D2 and T2
L6 L1-L2 (EXP) * full expansion stress range
* Use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
Note:

For piping codes with no expansion stress computation, simply include the thermal
displacements in the operating cases as shown above.


Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and Settlement
For settlement, use a CNode on any affected restraints. This CNode must be a node number not used elsewhere
in the model. Place the settlement on the CNode using a displacement vector not already used for thermal
displacements. We used D3 to describe restraint settlement in this example.
L1 W+T1+D1+D3+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) * effects of T1, D1, and settlement
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) * effects of T2, D2, and settlement
L6 L1-L2 (EXP) * full expansion stress range with settlement
Settlement is evaluated as an expansion load because it is strain-related with a half-cycle.
*Note

: For piping codes with no expansion stress computation add the thermal and settlement
displacements to the operating cases as shown above.
Load Cases with Pitch and Roll
In offshore piping evaluation there is often platform or relative movement between 2 platforms with inter-
connected piping. This also applies to FSPO and other shipboard piping systems. For these applications the
pitch and roll displacements are applied to CNodes on each affected restraint similar to settlement. Use the
displacement vectors not in use to describe thermal displacement boundary conditions. Usually there is a +
displacement and a - displacement to describe the peak pitch and roll conditions. Look at the state of the
platform at its peaks to determine the worst 2 conditions for relative displacement between piping separated by
the largest distance along the line of wave travel. D3 and D4 are used to describe 2 peak pitch conditions. D1 is a
thermal displacement.
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) *Use the algebraic combination method under theLoad Case Options
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) * Use the algebraic combination method under the
tab
Load Case Options
.It is likely that because of the large number of displacement cycles common in pitch and roll situations, you will want to
perform a fatigue analysis. Select the appropriate fatigue curve on the first piping input spreadsheet under the
tab
Allowable
Stress area. From the Load Case Editor
L6 L1-L3 (FAT) 21000000
add the following 2 cases for the example above and add the number of cycles for
each pitch condition.
L7 L2-L3 (FAT) 21000000
The 21000000 above represents 21 million load cycles during the life of the piping system. For large
displacements such as those that occur during a 1 yr, 30 yr, or 100 yr event, use a low number of cycles as
would occur during the life of such a storm multiplied by the number storms likely to happen during the lifetime
of the piping system. These displacements ARE NOT

considered occasional loads because they only involve
primary loads and are not strain-related.


Load Cases for Other Types of Occasional Loads
Wind and Wave
The methodology is the same for all occasional loads regardless of the source. So for a Wind analysis simply
replace the U1 and U3 above with Win1 and Win2 (there is not likely to be a vertical component of wind
considered) in the load cases. For Wave loading, replace U1 and U3 above with Wav1 and Wav2 (there is not
likely to be a vertical component of wave considered) in the load cases.
Relief Valve
For relief valve firing, calculate the thrust force of the relief valve and place a concentrated load equal to the
thrust force at the appropriate place downstream such as at the first bend node or intersection node of a tee. Also
place an equal force, but in the opposite direction on the back of the relief valve. Then replace U1 above with F1
in the load cases. The example below has two relief valves that fire independently. They may fire individually
or together.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+F1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1+F2 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+F1+F2 (OPE)
L5 W+P1 (SUS)
L6 L1-L5 (EXP) *
L7 L2-L1 (OCC) *
L8 L3-L1 (OCC) *
L9 L4-L1 (OCC) *
L10 L5+L7 (OCC) **
L11 L5+L8 (OCC) **
L12 L5+L9 (OCC) **
* Use the Algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options
** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method under the
tab.
Load Case Options
Snow and Ice Load
tab.
Snow load is a uniform load in units of weight per length (lb/ft, N/m, etc.). Multiply the depth/thickness of
snow/ice on the piping by the density of snow/ice and the pipe outside diameter to calculate the uniform load. If
the piping enters a building or will otherwise have no snow/ice load, re-activate the uniform load at that node
and enter all zeroes. For snow/ice loads, the uniform load will always be negative in the vertical direction. The
load cases are the same as described earlier for seismic, wind, and wave, but with only one uniform load vector
they are somewhat simplified.

Waterhammer Loads, Seismic Loads With Anchor Movements
It is not recommended to attempt to simulate waterhammer loads statically. See the example in the Technical
Reference Manual for dynamic analysis of a system undergoing waterhammer.
It is not recommended to attempt a static seismic analysis when anchor movements are present. Rather a
dynamic analysis should be done using the Spectrum analysis method. See the example in the Technical
Reference Manual for Earthquake Spectrum analysis of a system undergoing anchor movements.


Static Seismic Load Cases
While in piping input, click KAUX->SPECIAL EXECUTION PARAMETERS and enable the Uniform Load in Gs box. On
the first input spreadsheet, activate the Uniform Loads field and enter the Seismic Load In Gs
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
. You should
input the X-direction acceleration in vector 1, Y-direction acceleration in vector 2, and Z-direction acceleration
in vector 3. This makes load case generation easier. Since any seismic event is likely to occur while the piping
system is in operation, this is the load case that we want to consider. The operating case should have all
operating loads plus the seismic load. This load case is then used with the standard operating case to segregate
the effect of the seismic load, which then is combined with the static sustained load case for code compliance
considerations.
L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)
L10 L2-L1 (OCC)
L11 L3-L1 (OCC)
L12 L4-L1 (OCC)
L13 L5-L1 (OCC)
L14 L6-L1 (OCC)
L15 L7-L1 (OCC)
L16 L8+L10 (OCC)
L17 L8+L11 (OCC)
L18 L8+L12 (OCC)
L19 L8+L13 (OCC)
L20 L8+L14 (OCC)
L21 L8+L15 (OCC)
In load cases 2 through 7, we include all the loads and call these operating cases. The subtracted uniform load
vectors reverse the direction of the uniform load applied. Use these load case results for occasional restraint
loads and occasional displacements. Load Cases 10 through 15 signify the segregated occasional loads.
Although we call these occasional load cases, we dont need a code stress check here as these are only part of the
final solution for code compliance. Therefore, under the Load Case Options tab, we can select Suppress for
the Output Status. Also these combination load cases all use the Algebraic Combination Method on the Load
Case Options tab. Load cases 16 through 21 are all used for code compliance. We add the segregated
occasional results to the sustained case results and use either the Scalar or ABS Absolute Value Combination
Method on the Load Case Options tab. Both scalar and absolute will give us the same code stress results
although the displacements, forces, and moments could be different. Since we dont really use any results except


the stresses for combination cases, it really does not matter which combination method you use. Sometimes we
want to combine the results of vertical g-loads with horizontal g-loads. Often a factor is applied to the vertical g-
load component of the combined load. This can be accomplished initially when entering in the Uniform Load on
the input spreadsheet for the vertical component or you can do this directly in the load case editor as shown
below. Using the example above we will combine .67 vertical g-load with each horizontal component.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1+0.67U2 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1+0.67U2 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L8 W+T1+P1+U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
L9 W+T1+P1-U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
L10 W+P1 (SUS)
L11 L1-L10 (EXP)
L12 L2-L1 (OCC)
L13 L3-L1 (OCC)
L14 L4-L1 (OCC)
L15 L5-L1 (OCC)
L16 L6-L1 (OCC)
L17 L7-L1 (OCC)
L18 L8-L1 (OCC)
L19 L9-L1 (OCC)
L20 L10+L12 (OCC)
L21 L10+L13 (OCC)
L22 L10+L14 (OCC)
L23 L10+L15 (OCC)
L24 L10+L16 (OCC)
L25 L10+L17 (OCC)
L26 L10+L18 (OCC)
L27 L10+L19 (OCC)
At times it is required to combine the horizontal and vertical components of seismic loading together. You can
do this in the Load Case Editor. Set up the static seismic load cases as shown in the first example above, then
combine the segregated horizontal and vertical load cases together using the SRSS Combination Method on the
Load Case Options
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
tab. Add these last results to the sustained case as shown below:


L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)
L10 L2-L1 (OCC) *
L11 L3-L1 (OCC) *
L12 L4-L1 (OCC) *
L13 L5-L1 (OCC) *
L14 L6-L1 (OCC) *
L15 L7-L1 (OCC) *
L16 L10+L12 (OCC) **
L17 L10+L13 (OCC) **
L18 L11+L12 (OCC) **
L19 L11+L13 (OCC) **
L20 L14+L12 (OCC) **
L21 L14+L13 (OCC) **
L22 L15+L12 (OCC) **
L23 L15+L13 (OCC) **
L24 L8+L16 (OCC) ***
L25 L8+L17 (OCC) ***
L26 L8+L18 (OCC) ***
L27 L8+L19 (OCC) ***
L28 L8+L20 (OCC) ***
L29 L8+L21 (OCC) ***
L30 L8+L22 (OCC) ***
L31 L8+L23 (OCC) ***
* Use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options
** Use the SRSS combination method under the
tab.
Load Case Options
*** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method under the
tab.
Load Case Options tab.
Note: For piping codes not performing a sustained code stress check change the operating load cases
that include seismic loads to OCC and use these for code compliance. In such cases the combination
cases described above are not needed.


Providing Wind Data
Currently CAESAR II
AS/NZ 1170:2002
enables users to access wind load data from 13 different wind codes.
IBC 2006
Brazil NBR 6123 IS 875
BS6399-97 Mexico 1993
China GB 50009 NBC 2005
EN 1991-1-4:2005 UBC
ASCE #7 Standard Edition 2005 User -Defined Pressure vs. Elevation Table
User-Defined Velocity vs. Elevation Table

Up to 4 different wind load cases may be specified for any 1 job.
The only wind load information that is specified in the Piping Input is the shape factor. It is this shape factor
input that causes load cases WIN1, WIN2, WIN3, and WIN4 to be listed as an available load to be analyzed.
More wind data is required before an analysis can be made. When wind loads are used in the model, CAESAR II
Users can specify the wind data needed for an analysis by clicking the

makes available the screen to define the extra wind load data. Once defined, this input is stored and may be
changed on subsequent entries into the static analysis processor.
Wind Loads tab for the appropriate wind
load case. The Wind Load tab appears:

Wind Load Specifications


There are thirteen different methods that can be used to generate wind loads on piping systems:
AS/NZ 1170:2002 IBC 2006
Brazil NBR 6123 IS 875
BS6399-97 Mexico 1993
China GB 50009 NBC 2005
EN 1991-1-4:2005 UBC
ASCE #7 Standard Edition 2005 User -Defined Pressure vs. Elevation Table
User -Defined Velocity vs. Elevation
Table

You can select the appropriate method by placing a value of 1.0 in one of the Wind Direction Specification
fields. When using a pressure or velocity vs. elevation table, users need only specify the method and the wind
direction on the preceding screen. After clicking the User Wind Profile button, the dialog box prompts for the
corresponding pressure or velocity table. If a uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system,
then only a single entry needs to be made in the table, otherwise users should enter the pressure or velocity pro-
file for the applicable wind loading.
Note:
For example, as per ASCE #7, the following are typical basic wind-speed values:
To use the ASCE #7 wind loads, all of the fields should be filled in.
California and West Coast Areas-124.6 ft./sec. ( 85 m.p.h.)
Rocky Mountains- 132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)
Great Plains- 132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)
Non-Coastal Eastern United States-132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)
Gulf Coast- 190.6 ft./sec (130 m.p.h.)
Florida-Carolinas- 190.6 ft./sec (130 m.p.h.)
Miami- 212.6 ft./sec (145 m.p.h.)
New England Coastal Areas- 176.0 ft./sec (120 m.p.h.)
Copy Wind Vector - You can copy the Wind data from any defined Wind Case to any remaining Wind Cases
by clicking the Copy Wind Vector button. This is especially useful for large Wind Pressure or Velocity vs.
Elevation tables.


Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters
Up to 4different hydrodynamic load cases may be specified for any 1 job.
Several hydrodynamic coefficients are defined on the element spreadsheet. The inclusion of hydrodynamic
coefficients causes the loads WAV1, WAV2, WAV3, and WAV4 to be available in theLoad Case Editor
A
.
CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading dialog box is shown in the following figure.

In theLoad Case Editor, four different wave load profiles can be specified. Current data and wave data may be
specified and included together or either of them may be omitted so as to exclude the data from the analysis.
CAESAR II supports three current models and six wave models. See the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for
a detailed discussion of hydrodynamic analysis.
Note: Wave data may be copied between any of the four defined vectors to any of the unused vectors
by clicking the Copy Wave Vector

button.


Execution of Static Analysis
The static analysis performed by CAESAR II
Once the setup for the solution is complete, the calculation of the displacements and rotations is repeated for
each of the basic load cases. During this step, the
follows the regular finite element solution routine. Element
stiffnesses are combined to form a global system stiffness matrix. Each basic load case defines a set of loads for
the ends of all the elements. These elemental load sets are combined into system load vectors. Using the
relationship of force equals stiffness times displacement (F=KX), the unknown system deflections and rotations
can be calculated. The known deflections however, may change during the analysis as hanger sizing, nonlinear
supports, and friction all affect both the stiffness matrix and load vectors. The root solution from this equation,
the system-wide deflections and rotations, is used with the element stiffnesses to determine the global (X,Y,Z)
forces and moments at the end of each element. These forces and moments are translated into a local coordinate
system for the element from which the code-defined stresses are calculated. Forces and moments on anchors,
restraints, and fixed displacement points are summed to balance all global forces and moments entering the node.
Algebraic combinations of the basic load cases pick up this process where appropriate - at the displacement,
force & moment, or stress level.
Incore Solution status dialog box appears.

I ncore Solution Module
This dialog box serves as a monitor of the static analysis. It is divided into several areas. The upper side left
reflects the job size by listing the number of equations to be solved and the bandwidth of the matrix, which
holds these equations. Multiplying the number of equations by the bandwidth gives a relative indication of the
job size. This area also lists the current load case being analyzed and the total number of basic load cases to be
solved. The iteration count, as well as the current case number, shows how much work has been completed.
Load cases with nonlinear restraints may require several solutions (iterations) before the changing assumptions


about the restraint configuration for example resting or lifting off, active or inactive are confirmed.
In the lower left corner of the Incore Solver dialog box are two bar graphs, which indicate where the program is
in an individual solution. These bar graphs illustrate the speed of the solution. By checking the data in this first
box, users will have an idea of how much longer to wait for the results.
The right side of the solution screen also provides information to users regarding the status of nonlinear
restraints and hangers in the job. For example, messages noting the number of restraints that have yet to
converge or any hangers that appear to be taking no load, are displayed here. Nonlinear restraint status may be
stepped through on an individual basis by using the [F2]/[F4
Following the analysis of the system deflections and rotations, these results are post-processed in order to
calculate the local forces, moments, and stresses for the basic load cases and all results for the algebraic
combinations (e.g. L1-L2). These total system results are stored in a file with the suffix _P for example,.
TUTOR._P.
] function keys.
Note:
During this post processing, the Status frame lists the current element for which the forces and stresses are being
calculated. Once the last stresses of an element are computed, the output processor screen is presented. Use this
menu to interactively review the graphic and tabular results of the analysis. Interactive processing of output
results is discussed in Chapter 7 of this document.
The _A or input file, the _P or output file, and the "OTL" (Output Time Link File) are all
that is required to archive the static analysis. The remaining scratch files may be eliminated from the
system without any impact on the work completed.

Static Output Screen


Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases
Definition of a Load Case
In CAESAR II

, a load case is a group of piping system loads that are analyzed together, that are assumed to be
occurring at the same time. An example of a load case is an operating analysis composed of the thermal,
deadweight, and pressure loads together. Another is an as-installed analysis of deadweight loads alone. A load
case may also be composed of the combinations of the results of other load cases; for example, the difference in
displacements between the operating and installed cases. No matter what the contents of the load case, it always
produces a set of reports in the output, which list restraint loads, displacements and rotations, internal forces,
moments, and stresses. Because of piping code definitions of calculation methods and/or allowable stresses, the
load cases are also tagged with a stress category. For example, the combination mentioned above might be
tagged as an EXPansion stress case.
Piping System Loads
The piping system loads which compose the basic non-combination load sets relate to various input items found
on the Piping Input
Designation
screen. The table below lists the individual load set designations, their names and the input
items, which make them available for analysis.
Name Input items which activate this load case
W Deadweight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Refractory
Weight, Cladding Weight, Fluid Weight, Rigid
Weight
WNC Weight No fluid Contents Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Refractory
Weight, Cladding Weight, Rigid Weight
WW Water Weight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Refractory
Weight, Cladding Weight, Water-filled Weight,
Rigid Weight (usually used for Hydro Test)
T1 Thermal Set 1 Temperature #1
.
.
Designation Name Input items which activate this load case
P1 Pressure Set 1 Pressure #1


.
.
.
HP Hydrostatic Test Pressure Hydro Pressure
D1 Displacements Set 1 Displacements (1st Vector)
D2 Displacements Set 2 Displacements (2nd Vector)
D3 Displacements Set 3 Displacements (3rd Vector)

D9 Displacement Set 9 Displacements (9th Vector)
F1 Force Set 1 Forces/Moments (1st Vector)
F2 Force Set 2 Forces/Moments (2nd Vector)
F3 Force Set 3 Forces/Moments (3rd Vector)
.
.
.
F9 Force Set 9 Forces/Moments (9th Vector)
WIN1 Wind Load 1 Wind Shape Factor
WAV1 Wave Load 1 Wave Load On
U1 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (1st Vector)


U2 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (2nd Vector)
U3 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (3rd Vector)
CS Cold Spring Material #18 or 19
H Hanger Initial Loads Hanger Design or Pre-specified Hangers
.
.
.
Note:

Available piping system loads display on the left side of the Static Load Case screen.
Basic Load Cases
Basic load cases may consist of a single load such as WNC for an as-installed weight analysis, or they may
include several loads added together such as W+T1+P1+D1+F1 for an operating analysis. The stress categories:
SUStained, expansion, occasional, operating, and FATigue are specified at the end of the load case definition.
The complete definition of the two examples are: WNC (SUS) and W+T1+P1+D1+H (OPE). Each basic load
case is entered in this manner in a list for analysis.
When building basic load cases, load components (such as W, T1, D1, WIND1, etc.) may be preceded by scale
factors such as 2.0, -0.5, etc. Likewise, when building combination cases, references to previous load cases may
also be preceded by scale factors as well. This provides you with several benefits:
In the event that 1 loading is a multiple of the other i.e., Safe Shutdown Earthquake, being 2 times Operating
Basis Earthquake, only 1 loading need be entered in the piping input module; it may be used in a scaled or
unscaled form in the Load Case Editor.
In the event that a loading may be directionally reversible (i.e., wind or earthquake) only one loading need
be entered in the piping input module; it may be used preceded by a +or a - to switch direction.
Load Rating Design Factor (LRDF) methods may be implemented by scaling individual load components by
their risk-dependent factors, for example:
1.05W +1.1T1+1.1D1+1.25 WIND1
Note:
You may combine results of the basic load cases using algebraic combination cases. Always enter these
algebraic combinations after the last of the basic load cases. Designate Combinations of basic load cases by
using the prefix L1, L2, etc.
You may select the available stress types from the pull-down list on each line.
Note: All load cases with stress type FATigue must have their expected number of Load Cycles
specified.


An example set of loads displays below.

The following family of load cases provides a valid example of algebraic combinations.
Load Case Designation Comments
1 W+T1+P1+H+0.67CS (OPE)
Hot operating; note the scale factor
which takes credit only for of the
cold spring
2 W1+P1+H+0.67CS(OPE) Cold operating: with cold spring included
3 W1+P1+H(SUS) Traditional sustained case
4 WIN1(OCC) Wind case; note this will be manipulated
later to represent average wind 1X,
maximum wind 2X, also positive and
negative directions.
5 L1-L2(EXP) Traditional expansion case, cold to hot
(note reference to "L" for "Load", rather
than "DS".


Load Case Designation Comments
6 L1-L2(FAT) Same case but now evaluated for fatigue
at 10,000 cycles.
7 L1+L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (in
positive direction).
8 L1-L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (in
negative direction).
9 L1+2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind (in
10 L1-2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind (in
11 L2+L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind (in
12 L2-L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind (in
13 L2+2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind (in
14 L2-2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind (in
15 L3+L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustained plus
average wind.
16 L3+2L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustained plus
maximum wind.
17 L9+L10+L11+L12(OPE) Maximum restraint load case (the
combination option should be MAX).
Note: CAESAR II permits the specification of up to nine hundred ninety-nine load cases for analysis. In
the rare situation where more cases are required, the model should be copied to a new file in order to
specify the additional load cases.


Load Case Options Tab
CAESAR II offers a second tab on the Static Load Case screen - Load Case Options. Among other features, this
screen allows the user to define alternative and more meaningful Load Case names, as shown in the figure
below.

User Defined Names
The user-defined names appear in the Static Output Processor in the Load Case report (for more information,
see below), and may also be used in place of the built load case names anywhere in the Static Output
Processor, by activating the appropriate option.
Note:

Load case names cannot exceed 132 characters in length.
User Control of Produced Results Data
CAESAR II allows you to specify whether any or all of the load case results are retained for review in the Static
Output Processor. You can use the 2 controls found on the Load Case Options
Output Status
tab. These are:
This item controls the disposition of the entire results of the load case -- the available options are Keep or
Discard. The former would be used when the load case is producing results that the user may wish to review; the
latter option would be used for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate construction


cases. For example, in the load list shown in the figure, the Wind only load case could have been optionally
designated as Discard, since it was built only to be used in subsequent combinations, and has no great value as a
standalone load case. Note that load cases used for hanger design (i.e., the weight load case and hanger travel
cases designated with the stress type HGR) must be designated as Discard. Note that for all load cases created
under previous versions of CAESAR II
Output Type
, all load cases except the HGR cases are converted as Keep; likewise the
default for all new cases (except for HGR load cases) is also Keep.
This item designates the type of results that are available for the load cases, which have received a Keep status.
This could be used to help minimize clutter on the output end, and ensure that only meaningful results are
retained. The available options are:
Disp/Force/Stress - Provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This would be a
good choice for Operating cases, when designing to those codes which do a code check on operating stresses,
because the load case would be of interest for interference checking (displacements) and restraint loads at one
operating extreme (forces).
Disp/Force - Provides displacements restraint loads, global and local forces. This would be a good choice for
OPE cases when designing for those codes which do not do a code check on OPE stresses.
Disp/Stress - Provides displacements and stresses only.
Force/Stress - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This might be a good choice for the
Sustained (cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for restraint loads at one operating extreme
(forces), and code compliance (stresses). Note that FR combination loads cases developed under previous
versions of CAESAR II
Disp - Provides displacements only.
are converted with this Force/Stress type.
Force - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces only.
Stress - Provides stresses only. This would be a good choice for a sustained plus Occasional load case (with Abs
combination method), since this is basically an artificial construct used for code stress checking purposes only.
Note that ST combination load cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II
Snubbers Active?
are converted with this
Stress type.
Activating this option causes the snubbers to be considered to be rigid restraints for this particular load case. By
default, OCC load cases activate this option, while other types of load cases default to an inactive state.
Hanger Stiffness
The three options available here are As Designed, Rigid, and Ignore, and cause CAESAR II
Friction Multiplier
to (1) consider the
actual spring hanger stiffnesses, (2) model the spring hangers as rigid restraints, or (3) remove the spring hanger
stiffnesses from the model, respectively. As Designed should be used for most "real" (non-hanger design) load
cases. Rigid should be used for the Restrained Weight Case and any Hydrotest Case (if the spring hangers are
pinned during it). (Note that during the Restrained Weight Case user-defined hangers will not be made rigid.)
Ignore is normally used for the Operating for Hanger Travel Cases -- except in those cases where the user wishes
to include the stiffness of the selected spring in the Operating for Hanger Travel Case (and iterate to a solution).
In that case, the user should select As Designed for those cases as well. In that case, it is very important that the
hanger load in the Cold Case (in the physical system) be adjusted to match the reported hanger Cold Load.
This multiplier may be used to alter (or deactivate) the friction factors used in this particular load case. The


friction factor (Mu) used at each restraint will be this multiplier times the Mu factor at each restraint. Setting this
value to zero deactivates friction for this load case.
Elastic Modulus
Designates use of Cold (EC) or any of the nine (EH1-EH9) hot elastic moduli in determining results on a load
case per condition basis.

User-Controlled Combination Methods
For combination cases, CAESAR II enables you to designate the combination method to be used. Load cases to be
combined are designated as L1, L2, etc., for Load Case 1, Load Case 2, etc., with the combination method
selected from a drop list on the Load Case Options
Algebraic
tab. The available methods are:
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and pressures of the designated load cases in an
algebraic (vectorial) manner. The resultant forces, moments, and pressures are then used (along with the SIFs
and element cross-sectional parameters) to calculate the piping stresses. Load case results are multiplied by any
scale factors (1.8, -, etc.) prior to doing the combination.
The obsoleteCAESAR II combination methods DS and FR used an Algebraic combination method. Therefore,
load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II
Note that in the load case list shown in the figure, most of the combination cases typically are built with the
Algebraic method. Note that Algebraic combinations may be built only from basic (i.e., non-combination) load
cases or other load cases built using the Algebraic combination method.
using the DS and FR methods are converted to the Algebraic
method. Also, new combination cases automatically default to this method, unless designated by the user). In the
load case list shown in the figure, most of the combination cases are typically built with the Algebraic method.
Scalar
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in a
Scalar manner (i.e., not as vectors, but retaining consideration of sign). Load case results are multiplied by any
scale factors prior to doing the combination (for example, for a negative multiplier, stresses would be
subtractive). This method might typically be used when adding plus or minus seismic loads to an operating case,
or when doing an Occasional Stress Code check (i.e. scalar addition of the Sustained and Occasional stresses).
The obsoleteCAESAR II combination methods ST used a Scalar combination method. Therefore, load cases built
in previous versions of CAESAR II
SRSS
using the ST method are converted to the Scalar method.
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in a
Square Root of the Sum of the Squares (SRSS) manner. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors
prior to doing the combination however, due to the squaring used by the combination method, negative values
vs. positive values will yield no difference in the result. This method is typically used when combining seismic
loads acting in orthogonal directions.
ABS
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in an
Absolute Value manner. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the combination


however, due to the absolute values used by the combination method, negative values vs. positive values will
yield no difference in the result. This method may be used when doing an Occasional Stress code check (i.e.,
absolute summation of the Sustained and Occasional stresses).
Note:
Max
The Occasional Stress cases in the figure are built using this method.
For each result value, this method selects the displacement, force, moment, restraint load, and stress having the
largest absolute value from the designated load cases; so no actual combination per se, takes place. Load case
results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the maxima. This method is typically
used when determining the design case worst loads, stress, etc. from a number of loads.
Note:
Min
The maximum Restraint Load case shown in the figure uses a Max combination method.
For each result value, this method selects the displacement, force, moment, restraint load, and stress having the
smallest absolute value from the designated load cases; so no actual combination takes place. Multiply load case
results by any scale factors prior to the selection of the minima.
SignMax
For each result value, this method selects the displacements, force, moments, restraint load, and stress having the
largest actual value, considering the sign, from the designated load cases; so no actual combination takes place.
Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the maxima. Use this method
along with the SignMin method to find the design range for each value i.e., the maximum positive and
maximum negative restraint loads.
SignMin
For each result value, this method selects the displacements, force, moments, restraint load, and stress having the
smallest actual value, considering the sign, from the designated load cases; so no actual combination takes place.
Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the minima. Use this method
along with the SignMax method to find the design range for each value i.e., the maximum positive and
maximum negative restraint loads.

Recommended Load Cases
When you first enter the Static Load Case Editor CAESAR II
Operating load cases represent the loads acting on the pipe during hot operation, including both primary weight
pressure, and force loadings and secondary displacement and thermal loadings. Operating cases are used to find
hot displacements for interference checking, and hot restraint and equipment loads. Generally when
recommending operating load cases,
recommends, based on the loads defined in the
model, 3 types of load cases: Operating, Sustained, and Expansion (but not occasional).
CAESAR II
Sustained load cases represent the primary force-driven loadings acting on the pipe, i.e., weight and pressure
alone. This usually coincides with the cold as-installed load case. Sustained load cases are used to satisfy the
code sustained stress requirements, as well as to calculate as-installed restraint and equipment loads. Sustained
combines weight, pressure case #1, and hanger loads with each
of the thermal load cases (displacement set #1 with thermal set #1, displacement set #2 with thermal set #2,
etc...), and then with any cold spring loads.


load cases are generally built by combining weight with each of the pressure and force sets, and then with any
hanger loads.
Expansion load cases represent the range between the displacement extremes usually between the operating and
sustained cases. Expansion load cases are used to meet expansion stress requirements. Most users will specify
only 1 temperature and 1 pressure. This input simplifies the recommended cases to something like:
Case #1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ....OPERATING
Case #2 W+P1+H (SUS)....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE
Case #3 L1-L2 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE
You should review any load recommendations made by CAESAR II.
Note: CAESAR II
If the recommended load cases do not satisfy the analysis requirements, you can delete or modify them.
Conversely, you can reset the load cases to the program recommended set at any time. If you have an operating
temperature below ambient in addition to one above ambient you should add another expansion load case as
follows:
does not recommend any occasional load cases. Definition of these is the
responsibility of the user.
Case #1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ....
Case #2 W+D2+T2 +P1+H (OPE) ....
Case #3 W+P1+H (SUS)....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE
Case #6 L2-L1 (EXP)....you should add this since it is not recommended by CAESAR II.
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection
If you want to let the program design spring hangers, 2 additional load cases must be analyzed to get the data
required to select a variable support. The 2 basic requirements for sizing hangers are the deadweight carried by
the hanger hot load and the range of vertical travel to be accommodated. The first load case traditionally called
Restrained Weight consists of only deadweight (W). For this analysis, CAESAR II includes a rigid restraint in
the vertical direction at every location where a hanger is to be sized. The load on the restraint from this analysis
is the deadweight that must be carried by the support in the hot condition. For the second load case, the hanger is
replaced with an upward force equal to the calculated hot load, and an operating load case is run. This load case
traditionally called Free Thermal includes the deadweight and thermal effects, the first pressure set if defined,
and any displacements, W+D1+T1+P1. The vertical displacements of the hanger locations, along with the
previously calculated deadweights, are then passed on to the hanger selection routine. Once the hangers are
sized, the added forces are removed and replaced with the selected supports along with their pre-loads cold
loads, designated by load component H. Load component H may appear in the load cases for hanger design if
you have predefined any springs. In this case, it would represent the pre-defined operating loads. CAESAR II
Case #1W ....WEIGHT FOR HANGER LOADS
then
continues with the load case recommendations as defined above. A typical set of recommended load cases for a
single operating load case spring hanger design appears as follows:


Case #2W+D1+T1+P1 ....OPERATING FOR HANGER TRAVEL
Case #3W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ...OPERATING (HGRS. INCLUDED
Case #4W+P1+H (SUS) ....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE
Case #5L3-L4 (EXP) ....EXPANSION LOAD CASE
These hanger sizing load cases #1 & #2 generally supply no information to the output reports other than the data
found in the hanger tables. Cases 3, 4, & 5 match the recommended load cases for a standard analysis with 1
thermal and 1 pressure defined. Also notice how the displacement combination numbers in case 5 have changed
to reflect the new order. If multiple temperatures and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this
set after the second spring hanger design load case. Two other hanger design criteria also affect the
recommended load cases. If the actual cold loads for selected springs are to be calculated, 1 additional load case
WNC+H would appear before case #3 above. If the hanger design criteria piping system is set so that the
proposed springs must accommodate more than 1 operating condition, other load cases must additionally appear
before the case #3 above. You must perform an extra hanger design operating load case for each additional
operating load case used to design springs. Refer to the discussion of the hanger design algorithm for more
information on these options.

Chapter 6 Static Output Processor
In This Chapter
Entering the Static Output Processor .................................... 6-2
Standard Toolbar ................................................................... 6-4
Reports Navigation Toolbar .................................................. 6-6
Custom Reports Toolbar ....................................................... 6-8
Report Template Editor ......................................................... 6-9
Filtering Reports ................................................................... 6-12
Report Options ...................................................................... 6-14
General Computed Results.................................................... 6-27
Output Viewer Wizard .......................................................... 6-31
Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes .............................. 6-32
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor ........... 6-34
Animation of Static Results Notes ........................................ 6-38

C H A P T E R 6

6-2 Static Output Processor

Entering the Static Output Processor
With the completion of a static analysis the CAESAR II Output screen automatically appears, allowing
interactive review of the analytical results. Users may also be access the static results anytime after the analysis
has been completed through the CAESAR II Main Menu option - Output-Static.

Static Output
Once the output processor is launched, by either of the mentioned paths, the output screen appears. The left-hand
column shows the load cases that were analyzed. The center column shows the available reports associated with
those load cases. The right-hand column shows reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports that are
not associated with load cases.
Note: The proper job must be made current through the File-Open option before selecting the Static-
Output processor through the Main Menu.


Static Output Processor
The Processor screen enables you to manipulate all output review activity. The CAESAR II Output Processor
Interactively review reports for any selected combination of load cases and/or report types.

was designed so that piping results could be quickly reviewed in tabular form, graphically, or using any
combination of the 2 forms. Users may
Print or save to file copies for any combination of load cases and/or report types.
Add Title lines to output reports.
Note CAESAR II enables users to select either extended and/or summarized versions of most standard
reports. Also users may use theFilters

menu options.


Standard Toolbar
A number of commands are available:
File-Open
Opens a different job for output review. The user is prompted for the file to be
opened.
File-Save
Saves the selected reports to a disk file. The user is initially prompted for the file
name. After closing, or exit, a Table of Contents is added to the file.
Select Case Names
Allows users to select either the CAESAR II Default Load Case names or the
user-defined load case names for output reports. Also available on the Options
menu as Load Case Name. The user-defined load case names are entered in the
load case editor under theLoad Options tab.
Select Node Name
Allows users to select formatting of node numbers and names to output to reports.
Also available on the Options menu
Input
Returns to the piping input processor.
Animation
Allows users to view graphic animation of the displacement solution.
Plot
Enables the user to superimpose analytical results onto a plot of the system model.
This is described in more detail later in the chapter.
File-Print
Prints the selected reports. After closing, or exiting, a Table of Contents is printed.
This is described later in the chapter.
Microsoft

Word
For those users with access to Microsoft Word, CAESAR II provides the ability to
send output reports directly to Word. This feature permits the use of all of Words
formatting features (font selection, margin control, etc.) and printer support from
CAESAR II. This feature is activated through use of the Microsoft Word button when
producing a report. Word is available as an output device to the Static and
Dynamic Output Processors. Users can append multiple reports to form a final
report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the Microsoft Word button, closing
Word, selecting the next report to be added, clicking the button again, etc. A table
of contents, reflecting the cumulatively produced reports, always appears on the
first page of the Word document.


Microsoft

Excel
For those users with access to Microsoft Excel, CAESAR II provides the ability to
send output reports directly to Excel. This feature permits the use of all of Excels
features and printer support fromCAESAR II. This feature is activated through use of
the Microsoft Excel button when producing a report. Excel is available as an output
device to the Static and Dynamic Output Processors. Users can append multiple
reports to form a final report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the
Microsoft Excel
There is no table of contents generated.
button, closing Excel, selecting the next report to be added,
clicking the button again, etc. Each report displays in a separate spreadsheet with
the corresponding report name.
View-Reports
Displays the selected reports on the terminal. This permits the analysis data to be
reviewed interactively in text format. After selecting the desired combination of one
or more active load cases with any combination of report options and executing the
View-Reports button, each report is presented one at a time for inspection. Users
may scroll through the reports vertically and horizontally where necessary.
Enter Titles
Allows the user to enter report titles for this group of reports. CAESAR II enables
users to customize the report with a two line title or description. The title may be
assigned once for all load case reports sent to the printer or a disk drive; or the title
may be changed for each individual report before it is moved to the output device.
When CAESAR II receives this command a dialog prompts for the titles.

Report Titles
Note:

28 characters of each entered title line are displayed for 80 column output reports and 50
characters of each entered title line are displayed for 132 column output reports.
More/Less
Opens theOutput Viewer Wizard to the right of the Static Output Processor. It
aids the user in selecting specific reports and reviewing their order before sending
the output to the selected device. To close the Output Viewer Wizard click Less.


Reports Navigation Toolbar
Activate this toolbar by selecting at least 1 report for on screen viewing. When more than one report is selected
for viewing, the reports display in the tabbed view. You can click individual tabs at the bottom of the screen to
navigate 1 report to the other. You can also use the View Previous Report and View Next Report buttons to
navigate. Also, right-mouse clicking on the report opens the context menu with the Go To navigation choice.

Context Menu
Individual reports can be torn apart from the tabbed view and positioned around the screen real estate or
docked attached next to other opened reports for comparison view. To tear the reports from the tabbed
view, click with left mouse button on the corresponding tab at the bottom, then move the mouse while still
holding the left button down. The outline shadow will show new location of the report; release the mouse button.
You can print or save individual reports to a text file or to MS Word/MS Excel by using the right-mouse context
menu with options Send Report To or Send All To
While the report is active on the screen, it is possible to adjust the Display Properties available from the View
menu and change the background color or enable the horizontal and vertical grid lines. This feature may help
with better printing results.
.
While the report is active on the screen, it is possible to adjust the Page Configuration available from the View
menu ->Change Page Break. You can also scale the report to fit on 1 page or adjusted to a specified number of
pages, by using the Allow Adjustment of Page Breaks and Show Page Break Lines options.

Page Configuration Dialog



View Previous Report
Enables users to navigate through the reports. When all reports have
been viewed, the Reports Viewer dialog closes and returns control to
the Static Output Processor.

View Next Report
Enables users to navigate through the reports. When all reports have
been viewed, theReports Viewer dialog closes and returns control to
the Static Output Processor.
GoTo
Displays the list of currently opened reports in alphabetical order; allows
the users quickly and conveniently display the desired report.
Find in Report
Enables the report searching for specific node number, max values of
any of the fields that exist in the current report, of for any random text or
number.
Zoom In/Zoom Out
Enables zooming the report text in or out without affecting the actual
report font or formatting. The zoom level can also be controlled from the
right-mouse-click context menu. The zoom level is applied to the
currently active report and is temporal until the report is closed.
Save Current Custom Report
Template
Enables saving the changes to the custom report when the Report
Template Editor is launched.
Save Current Custom Report
Template with a New Name
Enables keeping the original report and saving the changes to another
report when the Report Template Editor is launched.


Custom Reports Toolbar
The Cust om Repor t s toolbar enables you to access several functions which can be used to manipulate the
generated reports.

Add New Custom Report Template
Enables you to create new custom reports. At least 1 load case must be
selected from the Load Cases Analyzed list box to enable preview.
Clicking this button displays the Repor t Templ at e Edi t or dialog.

Edit Existing CustomReport
Template
Enables you to modify and save existing custom reports, 1 at a time. At least
1 load case must be selected from the Load Cases Analyzed list box in
addition to the custom report name to preview the report. Clicking this button
displays the Repor t Templ at e Edi t or dialog.

Delete One or More Custom Report
Templates
Enables you to permanently remove a custom report templates. This action
cannot be undone.

Reset Default Custom Report
Templates
Enables you to replace the current custom report templates whether CAESAR II
or user -defined with the CAESAR I I Def aul t Cust om Repor t
templates. After clicking the button, all the user-defined or modified custom
report templates are replaced by the CAESAR II default templates.
Note: This action affects ALL jobs system-wide and cannot be undone.

View Custom Report On Screen
Enables you to view existing custom reports on screen. Any number of load
cases analyzed and any number of custom reports can be selected to view.
Custom Reports are presented 1at a time for inspection. You can scroll
through the reports vertically and horizontally where appropriate. Double
clicking the column headers allows sorting of the results.
Import Custom Report
Enables you to bring in a custom report template created by a different user or
on a different machine. The report template file extension is *.C2RPT and can
be read from any accessible location and does not require residing in any
particular directory. Once the report template file is read, it becomes a part of
the current CAESAR I I configuration. The new report is appended to the
Cust om Repor t s area of the St at i c Out put processor. The default
name of the template file corresponds to the custom report name. You can
access this feature is also available by clicking OPTIONS/CUSTOM REPORTS.
Export Custom Report

Enables you to save any custom generated report to a text file and share it
with other users. The report template file extension is *.C2RPT. This file can
be saved to any accessible location. The default name of the template file
corresponds to the custom report name. You can access this feature by
clicking OPTIONS/CUSTOM REPORTS.


Report Template Editor
After selecting the appropriate load case and custom report name and clicking Edit Existing or Add New
Custom Report Template theReport Template Editor dialog appears.

Report Template Editor Dialog
TheReport Template Editor
The template editor has a tree-like structure and resembles Window Explorers folder view. There are 11 major
categories available: Template Name and Template Settings for general report editing, and several output fields;
Displacements, Restraints, Local Restraints, Equipment Nozzle Checks, Global and Local Forces, Flange
Evaluation, Stresses, and Hanger Table Data.
dialog consists of two sections: the template editor to the left and the preview grid
to the right.
The Template Name category allows users to specify the report name, enter a brief description of the report, and
select the report type. The report name followed by the template description display on the preview grid if the
Include Report Name option is checked under the Template Settings

category.


There are 3 report types available:
Individual - generates output reports, one per selected load case, in the format similar to the standard
Displacements or Restraints
Summary - generates a single output report for all the specified load cases as a summary, in the format similar
to the standard
reports.
Restraint Summary
Code Compliance - generates an output stress check report for multiple load cases as a single report, similar to
the standard
report.
Code Compliance report.
Note
The
Actual columns and their order on the reports are controlled solely by the user. Data from
various categories can be customized on a single report to suit user's needs.
Template Settings category provides options for the report header and the report body text, formatting and
alignment. The font face, size, and color for the header and the report body may be set here. Users may wish to
include or remove specific header text (such as Report Name, Job Title or Filters Description) by toggling the
check box next to the corresponding item. Report Line Spacing enables user to change the spacing between
lines of text. The Summary Line check box (used with Summary-type reports) toggles the appearance of the
summary line with MAX values for each field/column per node. The Node Number/Name check box (used
with Summary-type reports), if enabled, repeats the Node information on each Loadcase line; if disabled, then
the Node will appear on the separate line above the data for Loadcases. These two options may help with later
data manipulations when sending the reports to MS Excel spreadsheet
Note
Each of the following categories consists of related output data. For example, Displacements category contains
three translational (
Any changes in the editor are immediately reflected in the preview window to the right.
DX, DY, and DZ) and three rotational (RX, RY, and RZ
Each field contains following information that can be easily controlled by the user:
) fields; Stresses contains Axial,
Bending, and Code stresses among other stress related fields. A number next to the field name indicates the
Column Number this field will be placed in. When nothing or zero value is specified, this column will not be
included in the current report.
Field Name Description
Column Number Indicates the order of the fields in the output report.
Precision Indicates the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Sort Order Specifies whether the data in the column is in ascending, descending, or in no order. This
gives the user flexibility of reviewing reports for maximum (or minimum) values without
extra effort.
Font Allows the user to specify text font face, size and color for this field whenever special
formatting is required. Note: The generic font settings for the entire report should be set at
the Template Settings ->Body category.
Align Values Allows the user to control left, right, or center alignment of the values in the column.


Field Name Description
Field Caption Allows the user to customize the name of the field as it appears on the report by typing the
new caption. This may be useful to customize the display of the output Displacements in the
report to reflect the Plant North/South/East/West directions or Vertical/Horizontal notations
instead of generic X/Y/Z.
Column Width Allows the user to control the size of the column in terms of the number of displayed
characters or digits. In addition, resizing the columns in the Preview Grid will adjust the
Column Width Value. Entering a "0" will close the column and remove it from the report.
Entering a "-1" will instruct the template to size the column to the predefined default size.
Units Based Precision Has two choices: Yes and No. When set to Yes, it enables the automatic control of the
displayed number of decimal places to be calculated based on the selected display units.
This value is used together with the Units Conversion Label value. The Precision value is
ignored in this case. When set to No, the Precision value takes place.
Note When a category or any particular field is highlighted in the editor, the help text for this field is
displayed in the Help
The
box at the bottom of the editor section.
Preview Grid on the right of the Custom Report Template Editor dialog is interactive. Users may drag
the columns by their heading to arrange the order of the fields in the reports. Double clicking the column header
will sort that columns values in ascending or descending order. The dragged column number or sorted order
value will automatically be saved in the Column Number or Sort Order entry of that field in the editor tree.
Clicking the column header once will highlight that field in the editor tree, extend its contents and scroll it to
view.
Note ThePreview Grid is limited to the first 50 lines for performance speedup. The entire report will
be available after selecting the appropriate load case(s) and the custom report name on the Static
Output Processor screen and clicking View Report
Any current changes to the custom report template can be saved by clicking
.
Save. The custom report template
can also be saved under a different name by clicking Save As... TheSave As... dialog appears prompting the
user to enter the new template name a brief description, and the report type. Clicking Preview Report enables
users to remove the grid lines from the Preview Grid

. Clicking the same button again will add the grid lines for
editing.


Filtering Reports
CAESAR II enables you to display a displacement, restraint, force, or stress within specified range. The filtering
can also be performed on specific Line Numbers. You can access this feature by clicking Filters from the menu
and the Filters dialog will display.

Filters Dialog
Filters are useful in processing reports containing fields from more than one class, for example the Restraint
Summary Extended report where fields from 2 classes restraints and displacements are present. For example, if
the Restraints Class is failing but the Displacements Class is passing, then the default OR combination would
print the entire dataset. To exclude this dataset from the report, the Class combination should be switched to
AND. All Filter choices are saved with the current job.
If you do not define a filter for any of the fields in the report, these fields are assumed to pass the filter condition
Note: By default both Fields and Classes are combined using the OR method: if any of the filtering
fields passes the filter condition, the entire dataset is printed. You may choose to switch to the AND
method in which only if all the filtering conditions are met will the entire dataset be printed. First, the
fields in each class are checked for the filter compliance. This initial field check determines whether
the entire class will pass or fail. Secondly, all classes are checked for the filter compliance. The data is
filtered by Line Numbers first, then by Nodes, then by Classes and Fields as specified in the Filter
Options.

and are printed. From and To nodes apply to all class tabs.


Using the Filters Menu Option
1. Enter data in the From Nodes and/or To Nodes field.
2. Select the appropriate Filter Option. In most cases the defaults are sufficient. Filtering by
Absolute or Signed Value: The default is to filter by the magnitude, regardless of the
sign/direction. You may filter by a specific direction of load or displacement; this feature is
particularly useful when looking for lifting off the supports in directional restraints (like +Y).
3. Select the appropriateCombination For field. Fields refer to the particular data items (columns)
in each class; for example, DX and RZ are in the Displacements class, or FX and MZ are in
the Restraints class, or Code Stress and Bending Stress are in the Stresses class. For further
information see the note below.
4. Select the appropriate Combination For Class and click Ok
5. Click the appropriate Class tab you want to apply the filter to.
to accept the changes. Classes refers
to the major types of output, for example Displacements, Restraints, Forces, or Stresses.

6. Enter the information on the Class tab selected. Each tab contains related fields with a drop
box and edit box. Each corresponding edit box displays the value to compare to. Each of the
drop boxes has a list of comparison operators:
Operator Description
> Greater than
>= Greater or Equal
< Less than
<= Less or Equal
== Equal
\= Not Equal
7. Click OK to accept the changes.
8. From the Options menu click View Reports.


Report Options
For most load cases, except hanger design and fatigue, there are a variety of different report options that can be
selected for review.
Note: Most Standard Reports have short and long versions, designated by the word Extended. The
extended reports usually have more data items available and may require a Landscape

option when
printed.
Displacements
Translations and rotations for each degree of freedom are reported at each node in the model.

Note: Users may now use the Filters

feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class.
For more information see Filtering Report.


Restraints
Forces and moments on each restraint in the model are reported. There is a separate report generated for each
load case selected.

Note:

Users may now use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class.


Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates
It is possible to generate a restraint report where the loads and moments are aligned with the local element
coordinate system. This is particularly useful when addressing skewed nozzles, where the axial, longitudinal and
circumferential results are needed. As an example, consider the small system shown below:

This system consists of two small horizontal lines, anchored at both ends. The last element of each line is
skewed 45 degrees in the X-Z plane. At the end of this skewed line is an axial restraint, as illustrated in the
following figure:


The typical Global Restraint report for this system displays in the following table. Note that at node 140 this
report shows two equal loads in the (global) X and Z
Operating Case Restraint Loads Global Coordinate System
directions. These values (24,463) are the global component
loads acting on the skewed restraint. The actual magnitude of the restraint load, acting in-line with the pipe can
be found by performing the SRSS of these component loads, which yields 34595. This value is the load on the
restraint acting axially with the pipe.
NODE FX lb. FY lb. FZ lb. MX ft.lb. MY ft.lb. MZ ft.lb.
100 -24463 66 -514 1340.5 -273.3 -6418.6 Rigid ANC
119 0 0 -24528 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
140 0 24463 0.0 24463 0.0 0.0 Flex X
200 -24463 -514 66 1340.5 -273.3 -6418.6 Rigid ANC
219 0 0 -24528 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
240 24463 0 24463 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X
The process of performing SRSS or sine/cosine operations to obtain restraint loads in the element coordinate
system can be tedious. As an alternative, a restraint report can be generated where all of the loads are aligned
with the associated element coordinate system. The report for the same small job displays in the table below.
Operating Case Restraint Loads Local Element Coordinate System
NODE fx lb. fy lb. fz lb. mx ft.lb. my ft.lb. mz ft.lb.
100 -24463 66 1340.5 514 -6418.6 273.3 Rigid ANC
119 0 -24528 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
140 0 34595 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X
200 -24463 66 514 1340.5 -6418.6 273.3 Rigid ANC
219 -17344 -17344 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z
240 34595 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X
In reviewing the relationship between the local versus global restraint loads note the following:
The global FY
At node 140, the skewed axial restraint, the first table showing the global coordinate system loads,
reports the two equal component loads. The second table showing the local loads, reports only the
resultant axial load at the restraint. (These values are shown in the tables in
(vertical) load at node 100 of -514 translates to a local fz load. For details on the
global to local coordinate system relations, please refer to Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference
Manual. (These two values are shown in the tables in bold for ease of visualization.)

italics for ease of
visualization.)


Restraint Summary
Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected load cases
together on one report.

Note: Users may now use the Filters



Nozzle Check Report
TheNozzle Check report defines the appropriate force/moment limits on a specified nozzle.

Data for the first nozzle at node 10 corresponds to the previous input. The Limits shown in the report are the
values from the input. Similarly, the Comparison
The
method also reflects the input setting. The loads shown are
the loads on the nozzle for the indicated load cases. If any load exceeds its corresponding allowable load, then
entire line is shown in red (with an asterisk at the far right in the event the report is printed).
Resultant column reports the resultant forces and moments for theSRSS Comparison method, and the
unity check value for the Unity Check

method.


Flange Reports
Flange Reports are available after completing the In-line Flange Evaluation analysis. There are two methods
and two corresponding reports for evaluating flanges under load: Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method (Peq)
and ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 Method (NC-3658.3)
The reports display some of the relevant input items along with the calculated corresponding Moments and
Stresses or Equivalent Pressure for each node where the Flange Evaluation was requested. This is an
.
elemental
type report, and the flanges may be defined on either end of the element; so some lines in the report with no
corresponding output would appear blank.

Flange Report


Global Element Forces
Forces and moments on the piping are reported for each node in the model.

Note: Users may now use theFilters



Local Element Forces
These forces and moments have been transferring into the CAESAR II Local Coordinate system. Refer to the
Technical Reference Manual for information on this local coordinate system.

Note:



Stresses
SIFs and Code Stresses are reported for each node in the model. The code stresses are compared to the
Allowable stress at each node as a percentage. Note that stresses are not computed at nodes on rigid elements for
more information see the figure on the following page.

Note: Users may now use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class.


Stress Summary
The highest stresses at each node are presented for all load cases selected in summary format for quick review.

Note:



Code Compliance Report
Stress checks for multiple load cases may be included in a single report using theCode Compliance report,
available from the Static Output processor. For this report, the user selects all load cases of interest, and then
highlights Code Compliance under the Report Options. The resultant report shows the stress calculation for all
load cases together, on an element-by-element basis.


Cumulative Usage Report
TheCumulative Usage report is available only when there are one or more fatigue-type load cases present.
Once the Cumulative Usage report is generated, regardless of the number of load cases selected, showing the
combined impact of simulating selected fatigue loadings.


General Computed Results
Load Case Report
The Load Case Report documents the Basic Names (as built in the Load Case Builder), User-Defined Names,
Combination Methods, Load Cycles, and Load Case Options (Output Status, Output Type, Snubber Status,
Hanger Stiffness Status, and Friction Multiplier) of the static load cases. This report is available from the
General Computed Results column of the Static Output Processor.


Hanger Table with Text
This report provides basic information regarding spring hangers either selected by CAESAR II or the user.
Information provided includes the node number, the number of springs required, the hanger table figure number
and size, the hot load, the theoretical installed load, which is what the hangers are set to in the field prior to
pulling the pins, the actual installed load, which is the load on the hanger when the pipe is empty, the spring rate
from the catalog, and the horizontal movement determined from the CAESAR II output. If constant effort
supports are selected then the hanger constant effort force is reported.

Input Echo
The input echo allows the user to select which portions of the input are to be reported in this output format. All
basic element data (geometry), operating conditions, material properties, and boundary conditions are available
in this report option.


Miscellaneous Data
This report displays the Allowable Stress Summary, Bend Data, Nozzle Flexibility Data, Pipe Report, Thermal
Expansion Coefficients used during analysis, Bill of Materials, the Center of Gravity Report, and Wind and
Wave input data.


Warnings
All warnings reported during the error checking process are summarized here.


Output Viewer Wizard
After clicking More >> in the lower right corner of the Static Output Processor, an Output Viewer Wizard
dialog displays to the right. The Output Viewer Wizard can be hidden again by clicking Less <<.

Output Viewer Wizard
TheOutput Viewer Wizard consists of the Report Order window and auxiliary operational buttons. It enables
users to add any report to the view by clicking Add or delete any report not needed by clicking Remove. Users
can arrange the order of the reports by moving them up or down by clicking Move Up or Move Down
Users may send a report to screen or to printer by checking the appropriate radio button in the upper section of
the
on the
selected report.
Output Viewer Wizard dialog. After clicking Finish, the reports are automatically sent to the specified
device in the order displayed in the Report Order
To generate a table of contents place a check mark in the
window.
Generate Table of Contents (TOC) box and a (TOC)
is appended to the printed reports.
Note The TOC will display if Send to Screen was selected, regardless if the TOC

check box was
enabled or disabled.


Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes
The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. Different combinations of load cases
and report types may be chosen, each followed by the File-Print command, to create a single report.
Print
Prints copies of the reports. To print copies of multiple reports as a single report, use
the Output Viewer Wizard to populate the report order tree, click Send To Printer
and then Finish.
File Save
Sends reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer. After selection, a
dialog appears where users must select the file name. To change the file name for a
new report, select FILE-SAVE AS.
Typically, the set of output reports that a user might wish to print out for documentation purposes might be:
Load Case Report Purpose
SUSTAINED STRESS Code compliance
EXPANSION STRESS Code compliance
OPERATING DISPLACEMENTS Interference checks
OPERATING RESTRAINTS Hot restraint, equipment loads
SUSTAINED RESTRAINTS As-installed restraint, equipment loads
Note
To save multiple reports as a single report to a file, use the
Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and hanger table
with text reports are printed only once even though more than one active load case may be highlighted.
Output Viewer Wizard.

Save As Dialog


Note: The signs in all CAESAR II Reports show the forces and moments that act ON something.
The Element Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act ON each element to keep
that element in static equilibrium. TheRestraint Force/Moment

report shows the forces and moments
that act ON each restraint.
Note: When sending reports to MSWord, if a file named "header.doc" exists in the \caesar\system
directory, its contents will be read and used as the page header when CAESAR II

exports the report to
MSWord. The intent is that "header.doc" contains the company logo, address details and formatting for
tables. The interface uses a style names "report table" which users can setup in "header.doc".


3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor
The Static Output Processor Graphics Engine is used to review analytic results in graphic mode. The Static
Output 3D Graphics Engine
Additional capabilities of the
shares the same general capabilities as the Piping Input Processor's Graphics. It
uses the same HOOPS Standard Toolbar that enables users to zoom, orbit, pan, and several other options among
them the ability to switch views and modes.
Static Output Graphics Engine can be found on the Output Toolbar and include
the display of displaced shapes, highlighting and zooming to maximum displacements, restraint loads, and
stresses of the model. One of the major advantages of the 3D Graphics over the original CAESAR II graphics is
the graphical representation of stresses by value and by percent using color.

Output Toolbar
A variety of CAESAR II Output Plot functions are accessed from the Show
The
menu that is broken into sub-
menus Displacements, Restraints, Forces/Moments, and Stresses. Alternatively, these functions can be activated
by clicking the appropriate buttons
CAESAR II Output Graphics Engine is extensive. Users are encouraged to experiment with all the output
options, noting which ones could be most appropriate for a given application. Some of the output options are
discussed below.
Deflected Shape
Overlays the scaled geometry with a different color into the current plot for the
selected load case. Clicking the arrow to the right of this button displays an
additional menu with the selected feature checked and the Adjust Deflection Scale
option.

Adjust Deflection Scale
Specifies the deflected shape plot scale factor.
Note: Entering a value that is too small may prevent visual detection of the
deflected shape. Entering a scale value that is too large may graphically "break" or
discontinue the model. This option can also be accessed from the Show menu, by
clicking DISPLACEMENT/DEFLECTED SHAPE.
Grow
Gives users an option to visually display the expansion of a selected pipe due to
the addition of heat.



Maximum Displacements
Places the actual magnitude of the X, Y, or Z displacements on the currently
displayed model.
Note: The element containing the displaced node is highlighted, and the camera
viewpoint is repositioned (preserving the optical distance to the model) to bring the
displaced node to the center of the view. It starts with highest value for the given
direction, after pressing Enter, the remaining values are placed in a similar manner
until all values are exhausted or become zero. Clicking the Maximum
Displacements button again clears the view of the displayed values and
highlighting. This option can also be accessed from the Show menu, by clicking
DISPLACEMENT/MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT/(X, Y, OR Z). If none of the highlighted
operations was previously used, the default report shown will be the Stresses
Report for currently selected load case.
Show Event Viewer
Grid
Shows/hides the Event Viewer on the plot. One of the advantages of the Event
Viewer Grid dialog is its ability to enable users to navigate among the elements,
navigate to various reports within a load case, and view the reports for other load
cases. This is done in the Report Selection window on the left in the dialog. This
window has a tree structure similar in operation to Windows Explorer. Clicking
the + sign for a particular load case will expand the tree of its reports. Selecting the
report displays the data in the grid view to the right. Selecting a node or an element
in the grid view (when Select Elements is enabled) highlights the corresponding
element on the graphics view, and zooms to the selected element if the
corresponding Zoom to Selection is enabled. Similarly, clicking an element on the
graphics view highlights the corresponding data row in the report view of the
Event Viewer
Changing the load case within the
dialog. Thus, this is a bidirectional connection.
Event Viewer Grid dialog will update the
graphics view (if applicable) and the Load Case Selection pull-down box on the
toolbar.
Select Elements
Allows the user to select one element at a time in the graphics. The Event Viewer
dialog is also used in conjunction with the Select Elements button. When Select
Elements is active, or when users double click on an element, CAESAR II
highlights it and displays it in the Event Viewer dialog with the corresponding
element highlighted in the report grid.
Output Restraints
Symbols
Adds restraints symbols to the plot. Restraints are plotted as arrowheads with the
direction of the arrow indicating the direction of the force exerted by the restraint
on the piping geometry

Maximum Restraint
Loads
Places the actual magnitude of the calculated restraint loads (corresponding to the
particular button) for a selected load case on the currently displayed geometry.
The Maximum Restraints Loads button displays the load magnitude value next
to the node, the element containing the node is highlighted and is brought to the
center of the graphics view. The Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer
Grid options are still available at the discretion of the user. After pressing Enter
any remaining values will be placed in a similar manner.


Maximum Code
Stress
Displays the stress magnitudes in descending order one at a time.
Note: The Maximum Code Stress buttons operation is similar to the Maximum
Displacements
The
button, the stress value is displayed next to the node and the
element containing the node is highlighted and is moved to the center of the view.
Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options are still available at
the discretion of the user. After pressing Enter
In addition to the "dry" numbers that could be found in a corresponding report, this
option gives the user graphical representation and distribution of large calculated
code stresses throughout the system.
the 2nd, the 3rd, etc. highest value
is placed in the similar manner with corresponding element highlighting.
Overstress
Displays the overstressed point distribution for a particular load case. Nodes with
a calculated "code stress to allowable stress ratio" of 100% or more display in red;
the remaining nodes/elements display in the color selected for the lowest percent
ratio. This feature is useful to quickly observe the overstressed areas in the model.
Note: Overstressed conditions are only detected for load cases where a code compliance check was done (i.e.,
where there are allowable stresses available).
Note: Overstressed nodes will display in red in the Event Viewer Grid (if it is enabled).
Note: The model is still fully functional, it can be zoomed, panned, or rotated at the discretion of the
user.
Code Stress Colors
by Value
Displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a
certain boundary value of the code stress. This feature is used to quickly see the
distribution of the code stresses in the model for a particular load case.
In addition to the model color highlight in the graphics view, the corresponding color key legend window is
displayed in the top left corner of the graphics view. The legend window can be resized and moved.
The colors and corresponding stress levels can be set in the CONFIGURATION/SETUP module, on thePlot Colors tab.
Code Stress Colors by
Percent
Displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a
certain percent ratio of code stress to allowable stress. This option is only valid for
load cases where a code compliance check was done i.e., where there are allowable
stresses available.
Code Stress Colors by Percent is similar to the Stress Colors by Value option and is used to quickly see the
distribution of the code stress to allowable ratios in the model for a particular load case. The legend window with
the corresponding color key also displays in the left upper corner of the graphics view. The legend window can
be resized and moved. Clicking the arrow to the right of the button displays an additional menu with 2 options:
Display and Adjust Settings. Selecting theDisplay option displays the color distribution. Selecting theAdjust
Settings option displays the Stress Settings dialog where desired values and corresponding colors could be set


or adjusted. These settings are related to the particular job they are set for and are saved in the corresponding
job_name.XML file in the current job data directory (see 3D/HOOPS Graphics in Piping Input Processor, 3D
Graphics Configuration chapter for more information on the *.XML file).

Code Stress Colors by Percent


Animation of Static Results Notes
CAESAR II allows the user to view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position of the basic load cases.
To animate the static results, execute the View-Animate command. The following screen appears:

Animated Graphic Screen
The Animated Plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the commands to activate
the animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume Motion produces 3D graphics. The desired
load case may be selected from the drop down list. Animations may be sped up or slowed down or stopped using
the toolbars.
CAESAR II also enables you to save animated plots as HTML files by clicking FILE/SAVE AS ANIMATION. After
saving these files users can view them on any machine outside of CAESAR II.
Note

The corresponding animation graphics file <job_name>.HSF must be transferred along with the
HTML file for proper display.

Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis
In This Chapter
Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II ................................... 7-2
Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview ...................... 7-5
Input Overview Based on Analysis Category ....................... 7-7
Harmonic ............................................................................... 7-24
Earthquake (Spectrum) ......................................................... 7-27
Relief Loads (Spectrum) ....................................................... 7-32
Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) ................................. 7-33
Time History ......................................................................... 7-34
Error Handling and Analyzing the J ob ................................. 7-36

C H A P T E R 7

7-2 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II
The dynamic analysis capabilities found in CAESAR II include natural frequency calculations, harmonic analysis,
response spectrum analysis, and time history analysis. Included with the CAESAR II Dynamic
Natural frequency information can indicate the tendency of a piping system to respond to dynamic loads. A
systems modal natural frequencies typically should not be too close to equipment operating frequencies and, as
a general rule, higher natural frequencies usually cause less trouble than low natural frequencies.
modules are
processors, which can generate several types of dynamic loads. An example is the processor, which converts
loading with respect to time into a force response spectrum. This ability to define different types of dynamic
effects improves the accuracy of dynamic modeling and makes these methods suitable for a wider range of
dynamic problems.
CAESAR II
provides both calculation of a systems modal natural frequencies, as well as animated plots of the associated
mode shapes.
CAESAR II
The third type of dynamic analysis available in
also provides for the analysis of dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature. Applications of harmonic
analyses include fluid pulsation in reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads
are modeled as concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper
phase relationship between multiple loads a phase angle can also be associated with these forces or
displacements. Any number of forcing frequencies may be analyzed allowing easy analysis of equipment start-
up, and any operating modes. Harmonic responses represent the maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system
undergoes and have the same form as a static analysis - node deflections and rotations, local forces and
moments, restraint loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement at node 45 of 5.8 cm.
then the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation would be from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at this point in the
system. The stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range.
CAESAR II is the response spectrum method. The response
spectrum method allows an impulse type transient event to be characterized by a response vs. frequency spectra.
Each mode of vibration of the piping system is related to one response on the spectrum. These modal responses
are summed together to produce the total system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the
sustained stresses, should be compared to the occasional stress allowables defined by the piping code. Spectral
analysis can be used in a wide variety of applications. Ground motion associated with a seismic event is supplied
as displacement, velocity, or acceleration response spectra. The assumption is that all the supports move with the
defined ground motion and the piping system catches up to the supports; it is this inertial effect, which loads
the system. The shock spectra, which define the ground motion, may vary between the three global directions
and may even change for different groups of supports (independent as opposed to uniform support motion).
Another response spectrum application is based on single point loading rather than a uniform inertial loading.
CAESAR II
The fourth type of dynamic analysis is time history analysis. This is one of the most accurate methods, in that it
uses numeric integration of the dynamic equation of motion to simulate the system response throughout the load
duration.
makes effective use of this technique to analyze a wide variety of impulse type transient loads. Relief
valve loads, water hammer loads, slug flow loads, and rapid valve closure type loads all cause single impulse
dynamic loads at various points in the piping system. The response to these dynamic forces can be confidently
and conservatively predicted using the force spectrum method.
CAESAR IIs Time History Analysis method can solve any type of dynamic loading, but due to its
exact solution, requires more resources (memory, calculation speed and time) than other methods. Therefore, it
may not pay to use this method when, for example the spectrum method offers sufficient accuracy.


Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis
The dynamic techniques employed by CAESAR II require strict linearity in the piping and structural systems.
Dynamic responses associated with nonlinear effects are not addressed. An example of a nonlinear effect is
slapping, such as when a pipe lifts off the rack at one moment and impacts the rack the next. For the dynamic
model the pipe must be either held down or allowed to move freely. The nonlinear restraints used in the static
analysis must be set to be active or inactive for the dynamic analysis. CAESAR II allows the user to set the
nonlinear restraints to any configuration found in the static results (this is done by specifying the number of the
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status). Most often the user selects the operating case to set the
nonlinear restraint configuration. For example, if a +Y support is active in the static operating case (normally
case 1 or 3), and the operating case is used to set the status of the nonlinear supports for dynamics, CAESAR II
installs a double-acting Y support at that location for the dynamic analysis. The pipe will not move up or down
at that point regardless of the dynamic load or tend to move.

A second nonlinear effect is friction. Friction effects must also be linearized for use in dynamic analysis. By
default CAESAR II excludes the effects of friction from the dynamic analysis. If requested CAESAR II can
approximate the friction resistance to movement in the dynamic model by including spring stiffness normal to
the restraint line of action. For a Y restraint with friction, the friction stiffness would be added in the X and Z
directions. The stiffness of these springs is a user-defined function of the friction has calculated in the static
analysis. For a Y restraint with friction, the friction stiffness would be added in the X and Z directions. The
stiffness of these springs is a user-defined function of the friction load calculated in the static analysis. CAESAR II
computes the friction stiffness by multiplying the resultant force on the restraint from the selected static case
results, by the friction coefficient, and by the user-defined Stiffness Factor for Friction. For example, given a
normal force on the restraint from the static analysis is 1000 lb and the friction coefficient (mu) is 0.3; the total
friction load is 300 lb. If the user-defined Stiffness Factor for Friction is 500, then springs having a stiffness of
SQRT(1000
2
+300
2
)*0.3*500=156605 lb./in are inserted into the dynamic model in the two directions


perpendicular to the friction restraint's line of action. Converting friction damping into stiffness is not
mathematically legitimate, but can serve as a good engineering approximation for dynamic friction in a wide
variety of situations. Note that the stiffness of "force" / "length" incorporates the user defined value for "force"
but the length here is always inches.

Major Steps in Dynamic Input
Developing dynamic input for CAESAR II
1 Specifying the load(s)
comprises four basic steps:
2 Modifying the mass and stiffness model
3 Setting the parameters that control the analysis
4 Starting and error checking the analysis
Except for starting the analysis, these steps may occur in any order. Due to the amount of data, which may be
specified, it is best to establish some sort of pattern in defining the input.
There is no reason to specify dynamic loads if only natural frequencies are to be counted or calculated.
Harmonic analysis requires the input of driving frequencies and forces or displacements to define and locate the
sinusoidally varying point loads. Creating the dynamic loads for spectra or time history analysis requires the
most attention by the user. The response spectra or time history profile must be defined, built, or selected. Force
sets must be built for force response spectra and time history analysis. Response spectra /time history (and force
sets) are combined with other data to build the load cases to be analyzed. Finally, additional load cases may be
constructed by combining shock results with static results to check code compliance on occasional stresses.
CAESAR II
For dynamic analysis,
provides several processors to simplify many of these tasks.
CAESAR II
In many instances the mass and stiffness established in the static model will be used without modification in the
dynamic analysis. Some situations, however, can be improved by the deletion of mass points or degrees of
freedom. Usually this occurs in analyses where the unnecessary masses are far from the area of interest in the
model or where the unnecessary degrees of freedom do not act in the direction of interest. Some piping
systems have supports that are installed to suppress vibration and do not affect the static analysis. These shock
absorbers or snubbers can be entered (if not entered in statics) during the dynamic input as additional stiffness.
converts each piping element from a continuous beam element between two
nodes to a stiffness between two masses. Additional stiffness is added at the mass (node) points to model
anchors, restraints, hangers, and other supports in the static analysis model. The masses assigned to each node
are one half the sum of all element masses framing into the node. These masses are used as translational inertias
only. Rotational moments of inertia are ignored in the dynamic mass model. (Their inclusion in the analysis
would cause a large increase in solution time without a corresponding improvement in the general accuracy of
the analysis.)
The major function of the control parameter list is to set the type of analysis to be performed: calculation of
natural frequencies and mode shapes, harmonic analysis, spectral analysis, or time history. General settings for
the analysis are also defined in the control parameter list such as maximum frequency cutoff and mode
summation methods. It is here, too, that the static configuration for nonlinear restraints (if any) is defined, and
the friction factor for including friction in the dynamic run is entered (the default friction factor is 0.0, which
implies that no friction stiffness will be used). The advanced option allows the user to change the parameters
governing the eigensolution (which does the modal extraction). These parameters should only be altered under
special circumstances.


Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview
Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu
The dynamic input module allows the user to specify the dynamic loads imposed on the piping system. To
perform a dynamic analysis, the static model must first be created and error checked through the CAESAR II
Input processor. Usually the model is also run through static analysis before the dynamic analysis begins but
this is not a requirement unless nonlinear supports or hanger selections are included in the model. If nonlinear
supports are present the static analysis must be run and the results made available before the dynamic analysis
can be performed. To enter the dynamics input, the proper job name must be current prior to selecting the
Analysis-Dynamics file options of the Main Menu.

Analysis-Dynamics Option
Upon entering the dynamic input processor, the following screen appears.

Dynamic I nput Processor


The type of analysis is indicated in the drop down list in the upper left portion of the screen (new jobs default to
Other). Input data is organized in pages according to type. Users can access these pages by selecting their title
tabs. After data is entered, the job can be saved, error checked only, or analyzed, using the menu commands or
toolbars.
A variety of dynamic analysis options are available and require different types of input. To simplify the input
process, the user should select the analysis from the drop list. Once selected, the input screen changes to reflect
the required inputs.

Dynamic Analysis Type Specification
Available commands during dynamic input processing are:
File-Save Input
Saves the current input data.
File-Check
Input
Checks the input data for errors or inconsistencies.
File-Run
Analysis
Starts the dynamic analysis.
Edit-Add Entry
Adds a new data line on the current input page (tab page).
Edit-Delete
Entry
Deletes the selected data lines on the current input page.
DLF Spectrum
Generator
Allows the user to generate a file containing a Dynamic Load Factor vs. Frequency
Spectrum from a Force vs. Time profile.
Tools-Relief
Load Synthesis
Provides a utility for estimating loads, flows, and other results for gas or liquid relief
valves.
Tools-Spectrum
Data Points
Used to enter data points for user-defined spectra.


Input Overview Based on Analysis Category
The multitude of dynamic analysis types available in CAESAR II can be somewhat intimidating at first. Selection
of Analysis Type

from the pull down list displays only those tabs for which input is appropriate. Those items are
discussed by analysis type.
Modal
Specifying the Loads
Modal analysis simply extracts natural frequencies and shapes for the systems modes of vibration. Therefore no
loadings need to be or may be specified.

Lumped Masses
On this page, the user may add or delete mass from the mass model. Extra mass which may have been ignored as
insignificant in the static model (e.g. a flange pair) can be directly entered here. Also weights modeled as
downward acting concentrated forces, must be added here (CAESAR II
For example, if a piping system includes a structural frame which supports the weight (the piping rests on the
structure and is connected to the structure only in the Y direction), these two systems (piping and structure) are
independent of each other in the X and Z directions, so the X and Z mass of the structure can be removed
without affecting the piping models results. With the X and Z masses removed, the calculations for the piping
structural model proceed much faster.
does not assume that concentrated forces
are system weights, i.e., forces due to gravity acting on a mass). Masses may also be deleted from the static mass
model; this is the same as deleting degrees-of-freedom. For the most part, mass deletion is a tool used to
economize the analysis. If the system response to some dynamic load is isolated to specific sections of the piping
system, other sections of the system may be removed from the dynamic model by removing their mass. Mass can
also be deleted selectively for any of the three global coordinate directions when deletion of directional degrees-
of-freedom is desired.

Snubbers

Snubbers


Certain supports, called snubbers, only resist dynamic loading, while allowing static displacement, such as that
due to thermal growth. It is on this page that snubbers can be included in the model. Snubbers must have their
stiffness explicitly entered (they do not default to rigid, since snubbers are typically not as stiff as other types of
restraints).
Note:

Snubbers may also be entered in the input processor rather than in the dynamic processor.
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard
Several common shock definitions are based on just a few parameters. Supplying these parameters to the
DLF/Spectrum Generator or Spectrum Wizard will produce these shock definitions. Three sources for seismic
spectra are used - the Uniform Building Code, ASCE 7 and the International Building Code - to build period
versus g load spectra. Two types of force response spectra (dynamic load factor versus frequency) are also built
here - the safety relief valve response spectrum found in B31.1 and a general force response spectrum derived
from the user's own time history.
Clicking the icon in the dynamic analysis input processor opens the Spectrum Wizard.

The following window appears:
\
Each of the five spectra may be selected using the radio buttons on the left side of the window. A default
spectrum name is provided but any valid file name, without blanks, may be entered in its place. Once the input
parameters are entered, the spectrum is built for the analysis by clicking theGenerate Spectrum button. To exit
this processor, click Done. After clicking Generate Spectrum, the processor displays the spectrum data and


awaits a user response Save to File, OK or Cancel. A completed shock spectrum is shown below:

Save to File
Saves the spectrum as a file with the same spectrum name in the current folder. 2 files are saved for the seismic
spectra, 1 horizontal and 1 vertical distinguished by the suffix H or V at the end of the name. You must specify
a unique spectrum name, or the processor will overwrite any existing files of the same name. You do not need to
save the spectrum data to a file to use the data in the current job, clicking OK does that. UseSave to File only if
you wish to reuse the data in other CAESAR II Dynamic
OK
analyses.
After clicking OK, the processor loads the appropriate data in the Spectrum Definitions tab in theDynamic
Input and moves the data to the dynamic input. Closing the processor, updates the dynamic input; lists the
spectrum definitions and enables reviewing of the generated spectra by clicking Enter/Edit Spectra Data
Cancel
at the
top of the dynamic analysis input window.
Quits the display without loading the data into the dynamic input. The specifics for each spectrum generator is
discussed below.

UBC
Clicking here creates horizontal and vertical earthquake spectra according to the 1997 Uniform Building Code
(UBC).


Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that will be generated here. A suffix of H and V is
added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once properly entered, these names are
listed in the Spectrum Definitions
The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in UBC Figure 16-3 (below).
Ts=Cv/2.5Ca & T0=Ts/5
tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these
names as data file names if you like. Do not include a space in the spectrum name.


The vertical spectrum will be set to 50% of ICa across the entire period range.
Importance Factor
This is the Seismic Importance Factor, I, as defined in Table 16-K. The calculated spectrum accelerations will
be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of
the structure.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
Based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, this is the "Zero Period Acceleration" for the site as defined in
Table 16-Q. Table values range from 0.06 to 0.66.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
Based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, this parameter sets the ground acceleration at higher periods
(lower frequencies) for the site as defined in Table 16-R. Table values range from 0.06 to 1.92.


ASCE7
Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra horizontal and vertical according to the ASCE 7 Standard.

Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that will be generated here. A suffix of H and V will
be added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once entered, these names are listed on
the Spectrum Definitions
The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in ASCE 7 Figure 9.4.1.2.6 (below).
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5. Above a period of 4 seconds, the horizontal spectrum acceleration changes to.
tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as
data file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the spectrum name.

The vertical spectrum will be set to 20% of SDS across the entire period range. Neither I nor R affect the
vertical spectrum.
Importance Factor I
This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, I
p
p
, as defined in Table 11.5-1, applied in accordance with paragraph


12.9.2. The calculated horizontal spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to generate the shock
spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5 based on the function of the structure
Site Coefficient Fa
Listed in Table 11.4-1, Fa is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum considered
earthquake acceleration (SS). Table values range from 0.8 to 2.5. This value is used with the mapped short
period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.
Site Coefficient Fv
Listed in Table 11.4-2, Fv is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped 1-second period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Table values range from 0.8 to 3.5. This value is used with the
mapped 1-second period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)
This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at
the system location for a structure having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping. Short period
accelerations are defined in the maps located in Chapter 22.
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)
the system location for a structure having a period of 1 second and 5% critical damping. One-second period
accelerations are defined in the maps located in Chapter 22.
This is the Response Modification Coefficient, R
p
p

, as defined in Table 12.2-1 and applied in accordance with
paragraph 12.9.2.
IBC
Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra horizontal and vertical according to the International Building
Code 2000


Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that will be generated here. A suffix of H and V will
be added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once properly entered, these names will
be listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these
names as data file names if you like. Do not include a space in the spectrum name.
The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in IBC 2000 Fig. 1615.1.4 (below).
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5

The vertical spectrum will be set to 20% of SDS (implied in 1617.1.2) across the entire period range.
Importance Factor
This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in Table 1604.5. The
calculated spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range
from 1.0 to 1.5 based on the function of the structure.
Site Coefficient Fa
Listed in Table 16.15.1.2(1), Fa is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (SS). Table values range from 0.8 to 2.5. This value is used with the
mapped short period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.
Site Coefficient Fv
Listed in Table 1615.1.2(2), Fv is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped 1-second period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Table values range from 0.8 to 3.5. This value is used with the
mapped 1-second period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)
the system location for a structure having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping where the probability
of its exceedance over 50 years is 2%. Short period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 1615.1.
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)
the system location for a structure having a period of 1 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of


its exceedance over 50 years is 2%. One-second period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 1615.1.
This is the Response Modification Coefficient, R, as defined in Table 9.5.2.2. The calculated horizontal
spectrum accelerations will be divided by this value to generate the shock spectra in accordance with Equation
9.5.6.5-3. This term reflects system ductility. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures and 3.5 for
piping is not atypical.

Mexican Response Spectrum
Generating a Mexican Response Spectrum:
You can generate a Mexican Response Spectrum using the Mexican Seismic Code. Generate the spectrum from
the Dynamic Input by clicking . Clicking displays the DLF Spectrum Generator dialog. Once the
dialog displays, click CFE Diseno por Sismo and enter the corresponding data on the right, as displayed below.

Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that are generated here. A suffix of H and V is
added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once entered, the names are listed on the
Spectrum Definitions
Seismic Zone
tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data
file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the spectrum name.
Select the correct zone from the menu. There are 4 different choices available: A, B, C and D. For more
information on the choices please refer to the Manual DE Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design Manual) for
Mexico. Page 1.3.29 of the manual displays a map with the different regions. It would appear that zone D is the
zone of highest seismic activity while zone A is the least active.


Soil Type
I Hard Soil:
Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity b0 =700 m/s or
modulus of rigidity >=85000 t/m.
II Med. Soil:
Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of
propagation which meets the condition: c Ts + s Tc> c Tc
III Soft Soil:
Ground deposits with fundamental period of effective vibration of propagation which
meet the condition: c Ts + s Tc < c Tc

Structural Group
Group A High Degree of Safety
Group B Intermediate Degree of Safety
Group C Low Degree of Safety
Towers and tanks are examples of Group A structures since a high degree of safety is required during their
design. Group B structures require an intermediate safety degree and those belonging to group C require a low
degree of safety.
Orthogonal Increase Factor
Mexican Earthquake Code considers an SRSS type effect on the structure. This value scales up the earthquake
loads in a linear (scalar) fashion. Traditionally this value 1.118 and should always be >1.0.
Analysis Notes:
As with every other earthquake loading analysis, the object is to compute the shear force at the center of mass of
each vessel element. Once the shear force at each elevation is known, the moments can be accumulated to the
base, leg or lug support.
You should begin the analysis by computing the weights and centroidal distances of all of the vessel elements.
It is very important to model the structure in sections that are appropriate in length. For cylinders, this value is
about 10 or 12 feet ( 3m ). This ensures that the program has enough information to compute the natural period
of vibration with sufficient accuracy.

With the given input data and calculated earthquake weights and natural frequency, PVElite determines the
values from table 3.1 of the Mexican Seismic Code.
The values are:
a Spectral Coordinate used in computing a
o

c Spectral Coordinate used in computing a
T
a
Period Value used in computing a (s)
T
b
Period Value used in computing a (s)
r Exponent used in computing a


Note:

For group A structures the values of the spectral ordinates ao, c obtained from table 3.1 are
multiplied by 1.5.
After defining the needed data, click Generate Spectrum to create the spectrum, as shown below.

Note:

This spectrum and its associated data are also linked with the remainder of the dynamic input
stream.
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum
Selecting this option creates a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum for loads from a
safety valve discharge into an open system in accordance with the non-mandatory rules of B31.1 Appendix II -
Rules for the Design of Safety Valve Installations.

Spectrum Name
This is the name for the force response spectrum that is generated here. Once entered, this name is listed on the
Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data


file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the spectrum name.
The spectrum is based on the curve shown in B31.1 Appendix II, refer to Fig. II-3-2.

Opening Time (milliseconds)
Enter the opening time of the relief valve.

User Defined Time History Waveform
Selecting this option creates a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum based on a user-
entered load vs. time history.

Spectrum Name
This is the name given to the Force Response Spectrum created from the time history load defined here. Once
entered, this name is listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and is used with the Force Sets to build the
Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the
spectrum name.


Max. Table Frequency
Enter the maximum frequency desired for the force response spectrum you are about to generate. The upper
limit should fall beyond the peak of the dynamic load factors calculated here. Ideally, the maximum table
frequency will show a constant dynamic load factor of 1.0
Number of Points
Enter the number of frequency/dynamic load factor pairs you want to generated for your data. Twenty is a
typical value.
Enter Pulse Data
Clicking here displays a table where you can define the time history of the event. For example a trapezoid event
defined at time 0 where there is no load, this load ramps up to full load of 1.0 (the load is normalized here) in 80
milliseconds; the load remains constant for the next 920 msec (at the time 1000 msec) and then ramps down to
zero over 250 msec.

Generate Spectrum
Clicking here converts the time history into its equivalent force response spectrum in terms of Dynamic Load
Factor versus frequency (below). The buttons on this window perform the same tasks as those defined at the
start of this section.



Response spectrum table values can be entered directly or built and stored as a file for use by CAESAR II
The Spectrum Wizard also serves this purpose -providing the spectrum definitions and data points. There are two
parts to the shock definition - 1) the statement of the name and type of data and 2) the table of actual spectrum
data points. If the spectrum data is to be read from a file, the second part of the shock definition is not necessary,
instead, the symbol #should precede the spectrum name to indicate that the data comes from a file on the hard
disk. The name of the hard disk file is the name of the shock spectrum without the symbol and without an
extension; it must be located in the same directory as the piping job.
such as
those generated through the DLF Spectrum Generator. Data stored in a file can be referenced by any job run on
the machine.
Note The Spectrum
When using a file created by the DLF Spectrum Generator, the user must tell
Wizard automates common shock definitions, for more information refer to the
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard later in this chapter.
CAESAR II
#TESTFILE FREQ FORCE LIN LIN
the type of data which
resides in the file. (The actual file only contains a table of data points.) This will always be Frequency vs. Force-
Multiplier data, with linear interpolation) so a typical definition might look like
This line tells CAESAR II that there is a file containing spectrum table points on the hard disk by the name of
TESTFILE, the table is comprised of frequency versus force multiplier data, and is to be interpolated linearly.
Note The data in this file may alternatively be read in directly from the Spectrum Data Points

dialog
box. In this case the "#" should be omitted from the spectrum declaration.


Force Sets

Force Sets
Force spectrum analyses, such as a relief valve loading, differ from earthquake analyses in that there is no
implicit definition of the load distribution. For example, for earthquakes, the loading is uniform over the entire
structure and proportional to the pipes mass. With relief valves (and other point loadings) the load is not
uniformly distributed and is not proportional to the mass. A water hammer load, for example, is proportional to
the speed of sound and the initial velocity of the fluid. Its point of application is at subsequent elbow-elbow
pairs. Force spectrum analyses require more information than the more common earthquake simulations. This
information is the load magnitude, direction, and location. Forces are grouped into like-numbered force sets
when these forces occur together, or need to be manipulated in the analysis together. Typical force set input
might appear as
-3400 Y 35 1
-1250 Y 35 2
where the -3400 and the -1250 are clearly the loads, Y is the direction, 35 is the node number, and the 1 and 2
are the respective load cases. This might indicate two different loading levels of one particular load.
For a skewed load, the force spectrum input might appear as shown below:
-2134 Y 104 1
-2134 X 104 1
This demonstrates multiple components in a single pulse spectrum set. (In the case above the pulse spectrum set
number is 1). These forces obviously belong in the same force set, since different components of a skewed load
always occur together.


Spectrum/Load Cases

Spectrum Load Cases
Spectrum Load Cases for force spectrum analyses are set up somewhat differently than Spectrum Load Cases for
earthquake analyses. The Spectrum Load Cases for force spectrum runs must link a Force Multiplier spectrum to
a force set.
The load case definition consists of one or more lines on which a spectrum, scale factor (usually 1.0), direction,
and force set number is given.
TESTFILE 1.0 Y 1
Note
More complex nuances of force spectrum load cases are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual. The
complexity increases as the number of components in the load case goes beyond 1, and as the time history
phenomena being modeled deviates from true impulse type loading.
The direction specified on this line does not need to be the direction of the load (which is
specified in the force set). This direction is used for labeling and designation of independent vs.
dependent loadings.

Static/Dynamic Combinations
This is discussed under Earthquake.

Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model
Lumped masses and snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.


Control Parameters

Control Parameters
These parameters describe how the analysis is to be conducted. Particular attention should be paid to the modal
summation methodology. Details are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.

Advanced
These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information, see the Technical Reference Manual.

Control Parameters

Control Parameters
These parameters describe how the analysis will be conducted. In general, this page would be used to set the
number of modes of vibration to extract by specifying a maximum number, a cutoff frequency, or both. Details
on these entries are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.

Advanced Parameters Show Screen
These parameters rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information, see the Technical Reference
Manual.


Harmonic

Harmonic Loads - Excitation Frequency
Harmonic load definition is broken down into two parts: 1) definition of the excitation fraudulency or
frequencies and 2) location and magnitude of the force and/or displacement load(s). Three input tabs are
available for specifying the loads.
Any number of individual frequencies, or frequency ranges (indicated by a starting, ending, and incremental
frequency) may be specified, one to a line. CAESAR II performs a separate analysis for each frequency requested.
Note
Harmonic loads may be specified on the
The number of anticipated load cycles may be entered for each frequency range. If the number
is entered, the load cases are calculated with a fatigue stress type. Otherwise, the load cases are
calculated with an occasional stress type.
Harmonic Forces or Harmonic Displacements input tabs. These
pages allow the user to enter loads (either force or displacement), direction, phase angle and node(s).

Harmonic Forces

Harmonic Displacements


Phasing can be important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle (entered in
degrees) relates the timing of one load to another. For example, if two harmonic loads are acting along the same
line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed towards each other (i.e. in opposite directions), which would
produce no net dynamic imbalance on the system, or the loads could be directed in the same direction (i.e. to the
right or to the left together), which would produce a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the
two forces. It is the phase angle, which primarily determines this relationship. The harmonic load data
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 0 105
produces an in phase, or same direction dynamic load in the system (1500 lbf. in the X direction and zero
phase at nodes 10 and 105), while
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 180 105
produces an out of phase, or opposite direction dynamic load on the system, which will tend to pull the system
apart. The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating pumps.
Rotating equipment may have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be converted into a
harmonic load that acts on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The magnitude of the harmonic load is
computed from:
Fn =(mass)(speed)2(eccentricity),
where (speed) is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along both axes
perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90 phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some regular interval
that is related to the valving inside the pump and the pump speed. This pressure wave moves away from the
pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves will cause loads at each bend in the piping system.
The load on each subsequent elbow in the system starting from the first elbow will be phase shifted by an
amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows, from the first elbow to the current elbow. It is the
amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs that produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping.
The phase shift, in degrees from the first elbow, is calculated from
phase =[(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance from the first
elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at each elbow is
Harmonic Force =0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
Note

All specified loads are considered to act together (with phasing considerations) at each applied
frequency.


Control Parameters

Harmonic Control Parameters
These parameters describe how the analysis will be conducted. Undamped harmonic analysis may be done by
setting damping to 0.0. Details of these fields are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.


Earthquake (Spectrum)
Earthquake loads are defined by defining one or more response spectra and applying them in a specified
direction over part or all of the piping system.

Response spectrum table values can be entered directly or built and stored as a file for use by CAESAR II. Data
stored in a file can be referenced by any job run on the machine. In either case, for a response table to be used by
CAESAR II
There are two parts to the shock definition - 1) the statement of the name and type of data and 2) the table of
actual spectrum data points. The
it must first be defined in the Spectrum Definitions page.
Spectrum Wizard also serves this purpose -providing the spectrum definitions
and data points. If the spectrum data is to be read from a file, the second part of the shock definition is not
necessary. Spectrum Definition describes the type of data in the spectrum (period or frequency vs. Force
Multiplier/DLF, Acceleration, Velocity, or Displacement) as well as the interpolation method for each axis. In
order to define a spectrum, the user should add a blank line.
Note To indicate that the spectrum is to be read from a file the symbol # should immediately
precede the spectrum name. (The name of the file is the name of the spectrum, without the # symbol,
and no extension is allowed.) Subsequent references to that spectrum do not use the # symbol.
Note The Spectrum

Wizard automates common shock definitions, for more information refer to the
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard section later in this chapter.
Spectrum
Data Points

If not read in from a file, the data points for a user-entered spectrum may be
entered by using the Tools - Spectrum Data Points command, selecting the
spectrum name, and entering the data.


Data Points
CAESAR II
ELCENTRO - Based on the May 18, 1940 El Centro California earthquake N-S component, and applies to
elastic systems with 5-10% damping. Values are taken from Biggs - Introduction to Structural Dynamics.
also has several shock spectra built in. These spectra may be used as part of a shock load case
without further input.
1.60H.5 - U. S. Atomic Energy Commission Regulatory Guide 1.60 Rev. 1, Dec. 1973 Horizontal Design
Response Spectra for 0.5% critically damped systems.
1.60H2 - Other AEC horizontal spectra for 2, 5, 7 and 10% critically damped systems.
1.60H5
1.60H7
1.60H10
1.60V.5 - Other AEC vertical spectra for 0.5, 2, 5, 7 and 10% critically damped systems.
1.60V2
1.60V5
1.60V7
1.60V10
UBCSOIL1 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991, soil type 1
UBCSOIL2 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991 soil type 2
UBCSOIL3 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991 soil type 3
Note:

Use of the Reg. Guide 1.60 or UBC spectra requires the input of the ZPA (zero period
acceleration) in the Control Parameters. This is the maximum ground acceleration at the site and is
used to scale the spectrum curves. The default ZPA is 0.5g.


Spectrum Load Cases

Spectrum Load Cases
Load cases consist of simultaneously applied spectra. Each spectrum in the shock case is assigned a direction
and factor. For earthquakes, the direction input defines the orientation of the uniform inertial loading
(commonly earthquakes have 3 direction components: X, Y, and Z). The factor is used to modify the
magnitude of the shock. For example, the seismic evaluation of a piping system might include two
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases: 1) 1.0 (100%) times of the El Centro spectrum in the X direction and 0.67
(67%) times of the El Centro spectrum in the Y direction and 2) 1.0 in Z and 0.67 in Y.
CAESAR II
The example below shows first a typical uniform support earthquake specification, and second a typical
independent support motion earthquake:
also supports options for independent support motion earthquakes. Here, parts of the system are
exposed to different shocks. An example is a piping system supported both from ground and building supports.
Because the building will filter the earthquake, supports attached to the building will not be exposed to the same
shock as the supports attached to the ground. In this case two different shock inputs are required, one for the
ground supports, and one for the building supports. To specify an independent support motion shock the node
range that defines a particular group of supports must be given. Additionally, the maximum displacement
(seismic anchor movements) of the support attachment point must be specified.
* UNIFORM SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT
ELCENTRO 1 X
ELCENTRO 1 Z
ELCENTRO .667 Y
* INDEPENDENT SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT
HGROUND 1 X 1 100 1 0.25
HGROUND 1 Z 1 100 1 0.25
VGROUND 1 Y 1 100 1 0.167
HBUILDING 1 X 101 300 1 0.36
HBUILDING 1 Z 101 300 1 0.36
VBUILDING 1 Y 101 300 1 0.24


The uniform support motion earthquake above contains only components of the El Centro earthquake acting
uniformly through all of the supports. There is a 33% reduction in the earthquakes magnitude in the Y direction.
The independent support motion earthquake above has two different support groups: the 1-100 group, and the
101-300 group. The 1-100 group is exposed to a ground spectrum. The 101-300 group is exposed to a building
spectrum. Different horizontal and vertical components were given for both the ground and the building spectra.
The last values specified are the seismic support movements.
Stress types may be assigned to the spectrum load cases by selecting from the drop list. If the Fatigue stress type
is selected, the user should also enter the number of anticipated load cycles.


Each shock case produces an output report listing displacements, forces, moments, and stresses. For stresses,
however, most piping codes combine the occasional dynamic stresses with the sustained static stresses. It is the
sustained plus occasional stress sum that is compared to the occasional allowable stress. This occasional stress
combination is provided through the Static/Dynamic Combinations page. Each combination references the static
load case number and the dynamic load case number to be combined. The static load case number identifies one
of the static load cases (usually the sustained case) in the static output. In most cases this is static load case 4 if
hanger sizing is included, or load case 2 if it is not. The numbers used to reference the dynamic cases are set by
the order of the dynamic load case input. Factors are specified with the static and dynamic case numbers to
increase or decrease the summed values. Any static/dynamic combination specified will produce an additional
dynamic output report. There can be any number of static or dynamic loads summed together in a single load
case. Each case to be added should be placed on a separate line. Both static only and dynamic only cases can be
manipulated. There is also independent control of the combination method. SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of
the Squares) methods or ABS methods can be used. The default is the ABS method. The input to sum 100% (1.0
times) of static case 2 with 100% (1.0 times) dynamic case 1 appears as follows:
S2 1.0
D1 1.0


Lumped Masses and Snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.

Control Parameters

These parameters describe how the analysis is to be conducted. Particular attention should be paid to the modal
summation methodology Details are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.

Advanced Parameters
These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information see the Technical Reference Manual.


Relief Loads (Spectrum)
This method is set up to solve a relief valve loading through Force Spectrum Methodology. In order to analyze a
piping system for a relief valve loading, it is first necessary to estimate the force-time profile for the loading.
This must then be converted to a Force Multiplier (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum. The applied force then must
be applied in conjunction with this spectrum.

Relief Load Synthesis

Relief Load Synthesis
If the user does not know the characteristics of the relief valve load, the Tools-Relief Load Synthesis
button provides a calculation scratch pad based upon a model of a relief valve venting steam or liquid to
atmosphere. This utility can be used to estimate relief valve thrust loads, exit velocities, and pressures which can
in turn be used to estimate the force vs. time profile of the applied load. Once all data is entered, clicking the
Calculate Results
Means of estimating the Force-Time profile for a relief load are shown in the Applications Guide.
button performs the calculations. For more information, see the Technical Reference Manual.


Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum)
Specifying the Load
This method of solving water hammer or slug problems is the force spectrum method as used for relief valve
loadings, except the relief load synthesizer is not necessary. The user estimates a Force-Time profile, then turns
it into a Force Multiplier spectrum, which is then linked to Force sets in the load cases. Means of estimating the
Force-Time profile are shown in the Applications Guide; subsequent steps proceed as described for Relief
Loads.

Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation
This is discussed under Relief Loads.

This is done in the same way as described under Relief Loads.

Force Sets
These are set up in the same way as described under Relief Loads.

Spectrum Load Cases
Development of the load cases is identical to that discussed under Relief Loads.

Static/Dynamic combinations are set up as discussed under Earthquake.



Time History
Time history analysis is used to solve the dynamic equation of motion for the extracted nodes of vibration, the
results of which are then summed to find the system results.

Specifying The Load
Loadings are specified in terms of Force-Time profiles and force sets. The Force-Time profile is used to define
the load timing; the force set is used to define the load direction and location. Either the profile or the force set
can be used to define the magnitude.

Time History Profile Definitions

Profile Definitions
Time history profiles are defined in a way similar to the definition of response spectra -- the profile must be
given a name, data definitions (which must be Time vs. Force), and interpolation methods. As for response
spectra, the data must also be defined-either directly or by reading in from a file (in which case the file name
must be preceded by the # symbol). The profile data may either be either be entered with actual forces, or
normalized to 1.0 (depending on how the force sets are defined).
One force-time profile should be defined for each load which hits the piping system i.e., each independent point
load. The loading case consists of one or more force profiles which may create a staggered loading on the
system.

Force Sets

Force Sets
Force sets are defined as described for Relief Loads. There should be one or more force set for each load profile
defined.


Note

If the force-time profiles were normalized to 1.0, the maximum magnitude of the loads should
be entered here. If the profiles were entered using their actual values, the force set values should be
entered as 1.0.
Time History Load Cases
Time history load cases consist of the multiple linkages of force-time profiles to force sets, as described to Relief
Loads. Only a single load case may be defined for Time History analyses.
Note

For Time History analysis, the direction entry is used only for labeling, rather than as an analytic
input value.
This is discussed under Earthquake.

Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models
Lumped masses and snubbers are modified as described for Modal Analysis.

Control Parameters

Control Parameters
These parameters define how the analyses are to be conducted. Details are discussed in the Technical Reference
Manual.

Advanced
These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information see the Technical Reference Manual.


Error Handling and Analyzing the Job
Button Description
Check Input
Reviews the entries on each page and notifies you of any errors which must be fixed.
Run Analysis
Performs the error check, and then if no errors are found, performs the analysis. In this
case, the next stop is normally the output review.

Performing the Analysis
Each of the 4 dynamic analysis methods modes, harmonic, spectrum, and Time History has their own procedure
for producing results. All of these analyses, however, start in the same manner. Once you save and check the
dynamic input, CAESAR II

follows an execution path similar to that found in Statics. If you activate accounting,
the account number is requested, the ESL is accessed (limited run ESLs are decremented), the element and
system stiffness matrices are assembled, and load vectors are created where appropriate. In Dynamics, the
system mass matrix is also generated. From this point the processing progresses according to the type of analysis
selected. Each of the 4 types of dynamic analyses are discussed below.
Modes
Once dynamic initialization and the basic equation assembly is completed, CAESAR II enters the eigensolver. The
eigensolver calculates the natural frequencies and modes of vibration. Each natural frequency appears on the
screen as it is calculated. The elapsed time of the analysis is also listed with the frequency. The processor
essentially searches for the natural frequencies, starting with the lowest, and continues until the frequency cutoff
is exceeded or the mode count reaches its limit. Both the frequency cutoff and mode cutoff are dynamic analysis
control parameters. The frequencies appear to pop out in a random fashion, perhaps three in rapid succession and
then one more several seconds later. The amount of time to calculate or find these frequencies is a function of
the system size, the grouping of the frequencies and the cutoff settings. Eigensolution may be cancelled at any
time, with the analysis continuing using the mode shapes selected up to that point. After the last frequency is
calculated, CAESAR II uses the Sturm Sequence Check to confirm that no modes were skipped. If the check
fails, you may either return to the dynamic input or continue with the spectral analysis. Sturm Sequence Check
failures are usually satisfied if the frequency cutoff is set to a value greater than the last frequency calculated.


Eigensolver
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. You can review natural
frequencies and mode shapes in text format. You can also display the node shapes in and animated format.

Harmonic
For each forcing frequency listed in the dynamic input, CAESAR II performs a separate analysis. These analyses
are similar to static analyses and take the same amount of time to complete. At the completion of each solution
the forcing frequency, its largest calculated deflection, and the phase angle associated with it are listed on the
screen. The root results for each frequency, and the system deflections, are saved for further processing. Only
twenty frequencies may be carried beyond this point and into the output processor. When all frequencies are
analyzed, CAESAR II

presents the frequencies on the screen and allows the user to select those needed (in terms
of frequency and phase angle) for further analysis. This choice can be made after checking deflections at
pertinent nodes for those frequencies.
Selection of Phase Angles
Phased solutions are generated when damping is considered or when the user enters phase angles in the dynamic
input.
For all phased harmonic analyses, the user is given a choice of selecting from 18 separate phase angle
solutions, (including the cycle maxima and minima) for each excitation frequency. Each separate phase angle
solution represents a point in time during one complete cycle of the systems response. The primary difference
between a solution with and without phase angles is when phase angles are entered, there is no way of knowing
beforehand just when the maximum stresses, forces, and displacements are going to occur during the cycle. For
this reason, the displacements and stresses are often checked for a number of points during the cycle for each
excitation frequency. The user must select these points interactively when the harmonic solution ends. There will
be a complete displacement, force, moment, and stress solution for each frequency/phase selected for output. In
most cases the largest displacement solution will represent the largest stress solution, but this is not always
guaranteed. The user is also presented with the option of letting CAESAR II select the frequency/phase pairs
offering the largest displacements on a system basis. The displaced shapes for the remaining frequencies are then


processed just like static cases with local force, moment, and stress calculations. Control then shifts to an output
processor identical to the static output processor. The output processor also provides the user an animated
display of the harmonic results. Users should remember that all harmonic results are amplitudes. For example, if
a harmonic stress is reported as 15200 psi, then the stress due to the dynamic load, which will be superimposed
onto any steady state component of the stress, can be expected to vary between +15200 psi and -15200 psi. The
total stress range due to this particular dynamic loading would be 30400 psi.

Spectrum
The spectrum analysis procedure can be broken down into three tasks - 1) calculate the systems natural
frequencies, mode shapes, and mass participation factors; 2) using the system frequencies, pull the
corresponding response amplitudes from the spectrum table and calculate the system response for each mode of
vibration; 3) combine the modal responses and directional components of the shock.
The first part of the analysis proceeds exactly as with the modal analysis.
After the natural frequencies are calculated, system displacements, forces, moments, and stresses are calculated
on the modal level and combined. Once all the results are collected, the dynamic analysis output screen appears.
The spectral results may be examined here, and the user may also review the natural frequencies and animated
mode shapes.

Time History
The modal time history analysis follows steps similar to a spectrum analysis. The modes of vibration of the
system are computed, the dynamic equation of motion is solved through numeric integration techniques for each
mode at a number of successive time steps, with the modal results being summed, yielding system responses at
each time step.
The output processor displays one load case (and optionally, one load combination) with the maximum loads
developed throughout the load application. There also are as many snap-shot cases as requested by the user.

Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing
In This Chapter
Entry into the Processor ........................................................ 8-2
Report Types ......................................................................... 8-4
Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File ...................... 8-15
3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor ................ 8-16

C H A P T E R 8

8-2 Dynamic Output Processing

Entry into the Processor
The dynamic output processor is accessed directly following completion of the dynamic analysis, or it may be
accessed anytime subsequently from the Main Menu Output options.

Dynamic Analysis Output
There are four types of dynamic output results to process:
Harmonic results
Frequency/Modal results from a Mode-Only solution (this solution also exists if a spectrum solution was run).
Spectrum results, from earthquake, waterhammer, and relief valve solutions
Time History results
Harmonic results are reviewed using the static output processor, which is discussed in Chapter 7 special notes on
reviewing harmonic results are presented later in this chapter. The other 3solution types share the same dynamic
output processor. After entering this processor, the Dynamic Processor screen appears:

Dynamic Processor


The left-hand column shows the load cases that were analyzed. The top center column shows the reports
available for those load cases. The right-hand column shows General Results
For Spectrum analyses, the load cases listed constitute all of the Spectrum load cases as well as all of the
static/dynamic combinations. For Time History analysis, the listed loads are the results maxima case and each
of the snap-shot cases for the single Time History load case and each of the static/dynamic combinations.
, or reports that are not associated
with load cases.
You can select the reports and the load cases you want to view by highlighting one or more load cases (if
necessary) and simultaneously one or more reports (reports that display in the right-hand column do not require
that the report is highlighted to print). (Select by clicking, CTRL clicking, and SHIFT
A number of commands are available from this screen:
clicking with the mouse.)
You can send the reports to a printer, print to file, save to file or display.
Option Description
File-Open
Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file; Modal/Spectrum
results are stored in *._s files, while Time History results are stored in *._t files.
Print
Prints the selected reports.
Save
Writes the selected reports to file, in ASCII format.
Animate
Allows you to view animated motion. Modem and spectrum results allow animation of
the mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated simulation of the
system response to the force-time profile.
Input
Returns to the piping input processor.
Title
Allows you to enter report titles for this group of reports
View Load
Cases
Provides a summary of each dynamic load case including the spectrum name, scale
factor, direction cosines, and node range.
View Reports
Displays the selected reports on the terminal. Each report selected is presented, one at a
time, for inspection. You may scroll through the reports where necessary. You can also
locate and highlight specific node numbers or results with the FIND (Ctrl-F) command.
To move to the next report click the right-arrow button.

Microsoft
Provides the ability to send output reports directly to Word. This feature is activated
when producing a report and enables the use of all of Words formatting (font selection,
margin control, etc.) and printing features. You can append multiple reports to form a
final report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the button, closing Word, selecting
the next report to be added, clicking the button again, etc. A table of contents, is
displayed reflecting the cumulatively produced reports.
Word
Output


Report Types
There are two types of reports available from the dynamic output processor. There are those associated with
specific load cases (the Report Options shown in the center column) and those not associated with specific load
cases (the General Results in the right column).
Note:
Reports associated with load cases are those associated with the spectral or time history displacement solution.
The Report Options are displacements, reactions, forces, moments and stresses.
For Modal analysis, there are no load cases, so the center column is blank
Displacements
This report gives the magnitude of the displacement for each load case. For spectral results, due to summing
methodology, all displacement values in this report are positive. For time history analysis, the values are
correctly signed.
The displacement report gives the maximum displacement that is anticipated due to the application of the
dynamic shock. For spectral analysis, note that all of the displacement values are positive. The direction of the
displacement is indeterminate, i.e. there will be a tendency for the system to oscillate due to the potential energy
stored after undergoing some maximum dynamic movement. The displacements printed are relative to the
movement of the earth.
Restraints
This report gives the magnitude of the reactions for each load case. A typical entry is shown as follows:
NODE FX
5 716
649
2X(1)
The first line for each node contains the maximum load that occurred at some time during the dynamic event.
The second line for each node contains the maximum modal contribution to the load, and the third line for each
node tells which mode and loading was responsible for the maximum. This form of the report permits easy
identification of the culprit modes.
The mode identification line is broken down as follows:
2 X (1)
mode load direction (load component)
For example, at node 5 the resultant dynamic load due to the shock was 716. The largest modal component (of
the 716) was 649, due to mode 2, and produced by the first X direction component (either the first support
motion set for displacement response spectrum analysis or the first force set for force response spectrum
analysis). This form of dynamic output report allows us to know if there is a problem, and if there is, then which
mode of vibration and load component is the major contributor to the problem.
If the component shows up as a (P), then it was the pseudostatic (seismic anchor movement) contribution of the


loading that resulted in the major component of the response. If the component shows up as an (M), this
indicates that it was the missing mass contribution. A typical restraint report follows:

Local Forces
This report gives elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate system. The a-b-c
coordinate system is defined as follows:
For straight pipe not connected to an intersection:
a is along the element axis (i.e. perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is axY, unless a is vertical and then b is along X
c is axb.
For bends and elbows, and for each segment end:
b is to the plane of the bend


c is axb
For intersections, and for each segment framing into the intersection:
b is to the plane of the intersection
c is axb
Note: X
Force, moment, and stress reports are similar to restraint reports in that each has the maximum response,
followed by the modal maximum, followed by the modal maximum load identifier. All force/moment reports are
setup to represent the forces and moments that act on the end of the element to keep the element in equilibrium.
indicates the vector cross product.

Global Forces
This report contains information identical to that given above for local forces except that it is oriented along the
global X, Y, and Z axes. A typical report follows:


Stresses
The stress report contains axial, bending, maximum octahedral, and code stresses as well as in-plane and out-of-
plane stress intensification factors. These reports contain mode, and modal maximum data as well. A typical
report follows:


Forces/Stresses
This report is intended to be a brief summary of the forces and code stresses for a particular load case. This
report contains maximum responses only, the calculated stress, and it's allowable.


Cumulative Usage
This report is available only when there are one or more Fatigue Stress types present. Only one report is
generated, regardless of the number of Fatigue load cases selected. The report shows, on an element-by-element
basis, the impact of each load case on the total Fatigue allowable, as well as the cumulative impact of all
simultaneously selected load cases. If the total Usage Factor exceeds 1.0; this implies Fatigue failure under that
loading condition.


The General Results reports comprise the following and are independent of the load cases selected. They are as
follows:
Mass Participation Factors
This report gives one number for each mode and load direction for each dynamic load case. This value provides
the user with a feel for the effect the dynamic loading and the mass had on the particular mode. Neither the
absolute magnitude nor its sign has any significance, only the relationship between values for a single load case
is important.


Natural Frequencies
Calculated modal natural frequencies are reported in Hertz and radians per second; period is reported in seconds.

Modes Mass Normalized
A mass normalization procedure is used to compute valued magnitudes for mode shapes. A number of programs
use this normalization procedure, and this report was generated to make it easier for CAESAR II users to compare
their results to other programs results.


Modes Unity Normalized
This report scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to 1.0, with all other displacements and rotations
scaled accordingly. This mode report is the easiest way to get a feel for the shape of the mode.
The example shows two mode shapes from a small job. Users should note that in the first mode the largest single
component is in the Y direction (which we would expect from the earlier participation factor report), and in the
second mode the largest single component is in the Z direction.
Note Unity normalized means that the largest displacement component in the mode is set to 1.0 and
all other displacement values are scaled accordingly.

Included Mass Data
The Included Mass Data report displays the percent of the total system mass/force included in the extracted
modes, and the percent of system mass/force included in the missing mass correction (if any) for each of the
individual shocks of each of the dynamic load cases. This value gives an indication of the accuracy of the total
system response captured by the dynamic model, with 100% being the difficult to achieve ideal.


The first 3 items displayed by the report are the Load Case, the Shock Description, and the direction cosines. The
next item, the % Mass Included, shows the percentage of mass active in each of the X, Y, and Z directions.
Following the % Mass Included is the % Force Active. This value is computed by taking the algebraic sum in
each of the global directions, and then applying the SRSS method to each of the three directions. (The sums of
the three directions are added vectorally.) The final column displays the % Force Added. This value is obtained
by taking the % Force Active and subtracting from 100.
Input Listing
This report, which may be displayed or printed, lists the input for the piping model or for the dynamic input.

Mass Model
The Mass Model Report shows how CAESAR II
The mass lumping report shown below is very uniform in distribution and should produce a good dynamic
solution. Note that
lumped masses for the dynamic runs. The mass lumping report
should show a fairly uniform distribution of masses. Large or irregular variations in the values shown should be
investigated. Usually these large values can be reduced by breaking down exceedingly long, straight runs of
pipe.
CAESAR II ignores rotational terms.


Boundary Conditions
The Active Boundary Condition Report shows the user how CAESAR II dealt with the nonlinear restraints in
the job. It shows which directional supports were included, which gaps were assumed closed, and just how
friction resistance was modeled.


Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. To print a hard copy of the
reports click FILE-PRINT. To send reports to a file rather than the printer, click File-Save. After initial
selection, the user is presented with a file dialog to select the name of the file. To change the file name
for a new report, the user should select FILE-SAVE AS.

Sends reports to Microsoft Word. The reports display in Microsoft Word where you can access
Microsoft Words feature set. All reports that are to be saved in the output file need not be declared at
one time. Subsequent reports sent to the file during the session are appended to the file started in the
session. (These output files are only closed when a new output device, file or printer is defined.) After
closing the report, a table of contents is added.


3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor
The Animation module allows users to view animated motion of the system for static displacements or various
dynamic movements. The mode and spectrum results, for example, allow animation of the mode shapes, while
time history analysis provides an animated simulation of the system response to the force-time profile.
The animation options can be accessed from the CAESAR II Main Menu, by going to the OUTPUT/ANIMATION and
selecting the appropriate animation type from the sub-menu choices. In addition, the animation processor can
also be activated from each of the individual Static/Dynamic Output Processors by clicking the View Animation
Animation of any type has identical set of buttons and menu choices (similar to ones described in the Piping
Input Graphics Processor) that will be described herein. Any relevant differences will be described below for
each corresponding animation type. Launching the Animation Processor causes the following dialog to display.

button.

The piping model is shown in its default state (volume mode, isometric view, orthographic projection). For the
convenience of the user, it can be displayed in any of the defined orthographic views Front/Back, Top/Bottom,
Left/Right, or Isometric by clicking the corresponding buttons. Similar to the Input Processor Graphics, the
model can be interactively rotated, zoomed, or panned. Zoom to Window and Zoom to Selection options are also
available.


Perspective or orthographic projections can also be set. Node numbers can be displayed by clicking the Nodes
button. The desired load case or mode shape can be selected from the corresponding drop down list. The
frequency of the load case associated with the animation is shown at the top of the view plot whenever the Titles
option (available from the Action menu) is activated.
The animated plot menu displays several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the commands to
activate the animation. Motion uses the centerline representation while Volume Motion produces the volume
graphics image. Each of the motion options causes the graphics processor to animate the current plot. If the
Node Numbers button is clicked, the node number text is moved together with the corresponding node. Once the
plot is moving on the screen, it may be sped up, slowed down, or stopped using appropriate toolbar button.
After selecting a different load case or mode shape from the drop down list, the motion automatically stops. One
of the motion buttons should be clicked again to activate the model movement.
Print Motion option (available from the File menu) prints all of the vibration positions of the current mode. It is
not available for the Time History animation. For clarity purposes, it is recommended to use the single line
(Motion) option to generate the printouts. The Volume Motion option generates a printout which is often too
cluttered to be useful.

Save Animation to File
The animated graphics can be saved to a file by clicking the Create an Animation File button. Alternatively,
this option can be accessed from the dynamic plot menu FILE/SAVE ANIMATION. After activating this option, the
standard Windows Save As dialog will display prompting the user to enter the file name and directory to save
the files. By default the current file name and current data directory will be used. There will be two files created
an *.HTML file and a *.HSF file. To view the saved animation, find the corresponding *.HTML file and double
click on it within Windows Explorer. The corresponding *.HSF file containing the animation routines will be
displayed. The *.HTML file contains buttons to play or pause the animation. The model can also be viewed at
different orthogonal planes, or returned to the isometric view.
Note
The first time a
The *.HTML is an interactive file.
CAESAR II

created .HTML file is opened with Internet Explorer or another internet browser,
the user will receive a message requesting permission to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. The user should
answer Yes to allow the download, after which the image will display. Once the model appears, right-clicking
the model will show the available viewing options, such as orbit, pan, zoom, and/or different render modes. The
image can be printed or copied to the clipboard as necessary.
Animation of Static Results - Displacements
CAESAR II allows the user to view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position for the basic load
cases. To animate the static results, execute the Options/View Animation menu choice from the Static Output
Menu. Alternatively, clicking View Animation
Static animation graphics has all the model projection and motion toolbar options described earlier. The load
case can be selected from the drop down list. The title consists of the load case name followed by the file name
and can be toggled on and off from the Action menu.
allows the user to view graphic animation of the displacement
solution.
The Static Animation processor allows viewing of the single line and volume motion, controls the speed of the
movement, and the animation can be saved to a file as described above.


Note The static animation does not have much physical meaning behind it. This is just a one-time
move produced from theCAESAR II calculated displacements (from temperature growth, initial SUS
system sag and/or any other related loads). It is better to use the Deflected Shape button on the
3D/HOOPS Graphics view of the Static Output Processor
Animation of Dynamic Results Modal/Spectrum
toolbar. For more information refer to
3D/HOOPS Graphics Tutorial for Static Output Processor, Deflected Shape.
This option allows the user to view the calculated modes of vibration that correspond to particular natural
frequencies of the system. It is available from the Dynamic Output Processor after running the Modal analysis.
After invoking the Modal animation type, the system is displayed in its default state. The animation screen
display the same toolbar options described earlier. Natural frequencies can be selected from the drop down list to
animate the corresponding mode shape. The title shows the natural frequency in Hz followed by the current file
name and the date.
Animated graphics for a particular mode shape (frequency) can be viewed in a single line or volume mode
motion with speed control, and/or saved to an HTML file for later presentation as described above.
Animation of Dynamic Results Harmonic
During the harmonic analysis, CAESAR II
The Harmonics Animation module can be launched from the Harmonic Output Processor by clicking View
Animation. The system displays in its default isometric state. The animation screen displays the same toolbar
options described earlier that allow single line and volume motion as well as speed up and slow down options.
Occasional cases corresponding to the excitation frequencies may be selected from the drop down list. The title
shows the currently selected frequency, file name, and the date. The title may be disabled from the Action menu.
calculates the system response to the excitation frequency. This
response can be animated.
Animated graphics for each load case analyzed can be saved to an HTML file for later presentation.
Animation of Dynamic Results Time History
The Time History animation module can be launched from the CAESAR II Dynamic Output processor by
clicking View Animation. The system displays in the centerline isometric mode. The model can be rotated,
zoomed, or panned and can be set to different orthographic projections. The current time history time step and
the job name are shown in the title on the top of the graphics view. Due to complexity of the time history
calculations and to decrease the animation time, the animation is only available in centerline mode.
Note: Save Animation to File
An additional feature of the Time History animation engine is the
is not available in the time history animation for the same reason.
Element Viewer. The Element Viewer
displays specific element information for a given time step. After clicking Element Viewer , the Element Info
dialog appears displaying the nodal displacements, forces, moments, code stress, and SIF information provided
for the current element at a current time step. Clicking Next >> or << Previous
There are several ways to animate the model using the
will change the information to
correspond to the next or previous element in the system for the same time step.
Motion button; clicking Next Step/Previous Step,
jumping to the beginning or the end of the time history animation; or using the Time Slider. Clicking Motion
starts the animation, the current time step is displayed in the title line, and the task bar at the bottom of the


animation graphics view shows the progress. You can increase, decrease or stop the animation speed by clicking
the correct toolbar buttons. Clicking Next Time Step or Previous Time Step while the Element Info dialog is
active will update the dialog information for the current element for the next or previous time step. If the
animation is stopped, this will advance or back space the animation one step. Clicking View Animation again
after stopping the animation will continue the time history motion from the location (the time step) where the
animation was stopped. Clicking the Plot the First Time Step or Plot the Last Time Step brings the animation
to the beginning or the end correspondingly. Dragging the Time Slider to the appropriate time step. The position
of the bar adjusts automatically as the animation progresses or you can click on the slider with the left mouse
button and drag it along the time-line to find the time step you want or to see the displaced shape of the model.
If the Element Info dialog is active, the highlighted element information is updated to correspond to the current
time step.

Time History Animation View with Element Viewer Dialog
Clicking the corresponding button can enable the node numbers however, it is recommended to have node
numbering disabled when using the animation processor. As the animated elements move, the node numbers are
redrawn for every position in the system creating a blinking effect that makes it hard to follow the animation.

Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler
In This Chapter
Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II................ 9-2
3D/HOOPS Graphics ............................................................ 9-7
Sample Input ......................................................................... 9-9
Structural Steel Example #1 .................................................. 9-10

C H A P T E R 9

9-2 Structural Steel Modeler

Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II

Structural Steel Frame
Start the CAESAR II Structural Element Preprocessor from theMain Menu by first opening an existing (or
new) structural file, and then using the Input-Structural command. The following screen appears:


I nput - Structural Steel
Note Structural file names should be limited to eight characters (with no embedded spaces) since
CAESAR II
Input is a interactive/batch keyword. This is a method of input most familiar to the finite element/structural
analyst and probably not so familiar to the piping engineer. Those users not already familiar with keyword
type input should pay particular attention to the examples, and make liberal use of the help functions ([F1]).
currently is unable to include long file names in piping models. The structural file must
also be located in the same directory as the piping model.
The general input format is:
<keyword>, <parameter #1>, <parameter #2>, ..., <parameter #n>
or
<keyword>, <key1=n1>, <key2 = n2>, ..., <key3 = n3>
For example......
FIX 5 ALL Fixes node 5, all degrees of freedom
SECID = 1,W10X49Defines properties for section #1.
EDIM 5 10 DY=12-0Define vertical member from 5 to 10.


Example I nput
Since many structures have a considerable degree of repeatability, there are various forms, options, and
deviations of the above commands to help the user generate large structural models quickly and easily. For the
most part however, and albeit with a little more time and effort, the above method of single element generation is
well suited to most pipers needs.
The most commonly used keywords display below:
EDIM Define structural element
FIX Define structural anchor (ALL) or restraint
LOAD Define concentrated forces
UNIF Define uniform loads
SECID
A full explanation of all keywords is included in the Technical Reference Manual.
Define cross section properties
To delete a command highlight it and click Edit-Delete Card
New lines may be created by selecting a keyword command from the menu or from the toolbars.
.
Certain commands set parameters that remain set for all further element generations. DEFAULT sets the default
section and material ID, ANGLE sets the default element orientation, and BEAMS, BRACES, and COLUMNS
set the default end connection type.
The full AISC database with over 900 cross-sectional shapes is available on a per-member-name basis,
additionally the user may define any arbitrary cross sectional shapes. The proper database (either AISC77.BIN,
AISC89.BIN, UK. BIN, AUST90.BIN, SAFRICA.BIN, KOREAN.BIN, or GERM91.BIN) must be selected
using the Configuration/Setup Module before starting the construction of a structural model. Sections may be
selected from a tree structure, grouping sections by type.


Configuration/Setup
AISC names should be keyed in exactly as shown in the AISC handbook with the exception that fractions should
be represented as decimals to four decimal places, i.e. the angle L6X3-1/2X1/2 would be entered:
L6X3.5000X0.5000.
Member end connection freedom is a concept used quite frequently in structural analysis that has no real parallel
in piping work. Several of the example problems contain free end connection specifications and should be
studied for details.
Structural models may be run alone, or may be included in piping jobs.
To run a structural model alone:
1 After selecting a job name, enter the Structural Input processor using Input-Structural from the
Main
2 Enter the structural steel model and its loading use
Menu.
File-Save to exit model building, do error
checking, and build CAESAR II Execution files if there are no errors. After completing these steps
return to the Main
3 Start
Menu.
CAESAR II up at the analysis level. Select the load cases to be analyzed. Do not use
CAESAR II
4 When the analysis level finishes, enter the standard
s recommendations unless a weight-concentrated load case is all that is needed.
CAESAR II Output Processor
5 Run the
. Displacements,
forces, and moments will be available for each structural element.
Analysis Program to ensure that the most heavily loaded members still satisfy the code.


To include a structural model (or models) in a piping job:
1 Enter the structural steel input processor as described above.
2 Enter the structural steel model and its loading.
3 Use FILE-SAVE to exit model building, do error checking, and build the CAESAR II Execution
4 Open the
files
if there are no errors.
Piping Input file. After the piping model has been entered to the users satisfaction click
Environment-Include Structural Files
5 From the
.
Include Structural Files dialog use the Browse
6 Exit the preprocessor after all structural models have been properly included in the piping job.
button to select the structural files to
include in the piping job.
7 Perform and error check of the model. Once error checking finishes without a fatal message, run the
entire model. After analysis, the structural elements are included in the piping output processor as
though they were pipe, except that stresses are not computed.
Note: A stand alone AISC Code Check

Program is available to verify that forces and moments on
standard structural shapes do not exceed the various allowables as defined by the American Institute of
Steel Construction.


3D/HOOPS Graphics
The3D/HOOPS Graphics Engine in the Structural Steel Modeler
The
is mainly used to verify the model
geometry for completeness and accuracy. An Interactive Command Generator allows user-friendly entering and
updating of the element data, along with a graphics view that instantly reflects any changes.
Structural Steel Modeler 3D Graphics Engine shares the same general capabilities as the Piping Input
Processor's Graphics. It uses the same HOOPS Standard Toolbar that enables users to zoom, orbit, pan, and
several other options among them the ability to switch orthographic views and volume to single line mode.

TheStructural Steel Graphics Engine
The geometry displays on the screen to the right when the user defines enough information. For example, using
Method 2 - Node/Element Specification Generator, if only NODEs (absolute coordinates of a point in space) are
generated, nothing can be shown. However, when ELEM is defined (to specify a single element between two
points in space), the corresponding graphical element displays. When using Method 1 - Element Definition
EDIM (similar to defining elements in the
can also show or hide the supports and restraints, anchors, the compass,
node numbers, and element lengths. The restraints may also be changed in size relative to the structural
elements.
CAESAR II Piping Input Processor), the corresponding graphical
element displays after the EDIM command is completed. For more information and a comparison of the two


methods, refer to theCAESAR II Technical Reference Manual
The
, Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler.
Structural Steel Command Generator may be resized and/or disabled to allow the graphics to fill the
entire viewing area. It may also be docked on or off the main frame. Once docked off, it can be removed from
the view or closed. To show/hide (open/close) theStructural Steel Commands Generator, click VIEW-INPUT
J ust as the
.
Piping Input Graphics does, the Structural Steel Modeler has aChange Display Option that
enables users to change the default colors for all steel elements and restraints. For more information refer to the
discussion in the Piping Input 3D Graphics Processor.
Note Loads, such as Uniform or Wind, are not available in plot/graphics mode in the Structural Steel
Modeler
An additional feature of the
.
Structural Steel Modeler is its ability to flip the coordinate system, on the fly. All
relevant user-entered data is also modified to comply with the newly selected coordinate system, either Y-up or
Z-up.


Sample Input
This section contains three Structural Steel Examples. These examples are presented so that the user can enter
them into the computer from the listed input. This is without question the best way to become familiar with the
structural capability in CAESAR II

.


Structural Steel Example #1
Determine the stiffness of the structural steel support shown below. Use the estimated rigid support piping
loads from the piping analysis to back calculate each stiffness.

A U-bolt pins the pipe to the top of the channel at node 20. The piping loads output from the pipe stress program
are:
F x=-39.0 lbs.
F y=-1975.0 lbs.
F z=1350.0 lbs.
Select FILE-NEW from the CAESAR II Main Menu, click the Structural Input radio button and enter a job
name (for example SUPP). Then enter the CAESAR II Structural Steel Processor by selecting option Input-
Structural from the CAESAR II Main Menu. This brings up the blank data entry screen, ready to define the
units.


At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters that define the model input. Input for the example is as
follows:





UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
MATID 1 30E6 .3 11.6E6 36000. 0.283 ;SPECIFY MATERIAL
SECID 1 W16X26 ;DEFINE CROSS SECTIONS
SECID 2 MC8X22.800
SECID 3 L6X4X0.5000
EDIM 5 10 DY=144. SECID=1 ;DEFINE ELEMENTS
EDIM 10 15 DY=72. SECID=1
EDIM 15 20 DZ=70 SECID=2
EDIM 20 25 DZ=20 SECID=2
EDIM 25 10 DZ=-90 DY=-72 SECID=3
FIX 5 ALL ;SPECIFY SUPPORTS
;TRY A PLOT HERE
LOAD 20 FX=-39 FY=-1975 FZ=1350 ;SPECIFY LOADS

I nput Structural Steel - Sample
The model can be checked and saved with theFile-Save command. At this time the input is checked, and if no


fatal errors are found, the CAESAR II Execution
When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the
files are written, and the model may be used in a piping
analysis or analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.)
CAESAR II Main Menu. When
this is done, the Analysis-Static menu option should be chosen. From this point, structural steel analysis is
performed just like a piping analysis.
Note:
Output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.
Don't forget to include F1 in the SUS load case.
The desired results from the analysis of SUPP are the displacements at node 20 of:
x = -9.63 in.
y = -0.44 in.
z = 0.88 in.
These displacements are excessive for a support which is to be assumed rigid in another analysis. The
translational stiffness for the support can be computed as follows:
Kx = 39.0 lb. / 9.63 in. = 4.05 lb./in
Ky = 1975.0 lb. / 0.44 in. = 4488.64 lb./in.
Kz = 1350.0 lb. / 0.88 in. = 1534.09 lb./in.


A support must be designed to limit the loads on the waste heat boilers flue gas nozzle connection. The
maximum allowable loads on the nozzle are:
Fshear = 500 lb. Faxial = 1500 lb.
Mbending = 5000 ft. lb. Mtorsion = 10000 ft. lb.
Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:


Piping Dimensions


Structure Nodes

Structure Dimensions


Select a job name (for example SUPP2) and enter the structural input processor as described earlier. The
structural input screen appears:

At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters (using menu options and/or toolbars) that defines the
model input, and adds them to the file using the Edit-Add command. Input for the example is as follows:
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
SECID 1 W24X104 ;DEFINE SECTIONS
SECID 2 W18X50
MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283 ;DEFINE MATERIALS
ANGLE=90 ;COLUMN ORIENTATION
EDIM 230 235 DY=10- ;VERTICAL COLUMNS
EDIM 235 220 DY=13-10
EDIM 200 205 DY=10-
EDIM 205 210 DY=13-10
EDIM 245 250 DX=8.392- DY=10- ;SLOPED COLUMNS


EDIM 260 255 DX=8.392- DY=10-
EDIM 250 220 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
EDIM 255 210 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
DEFAULT SECID=2;MAKE BEAMS DEFAULT SECTION
EDIM 235 240 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 240 205 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 220 215 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 215 210 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 250 255 DZ=-5-
;THE FINAL SET OF HORIZONTAL BEAMS ALONG THE X AXIS HAVE A STANDARD
;STRONG AXIS ORIENTATION
ANGLE=0.0
EDIM 250 235 DX=11.608-
EDIM 255 205 DX=11.608-
;ANCHOR THE BASE NODES
FIX 245 ALL
FIX 260 ALL
FIX 230 ALL
FIX 200 ALL
At any time during input the user can generate plots of the model by executing OPERATIONS-PLOT. Once the user is
satisfied that the model is correct, exiting with File-Save command checks and saves the model. If no fatal errors
are found, then the CAESAR II Execution
When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the
files are written. The model may now be used in a piping analyses or
analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed with a piping model.)
CAESAR II Main Menu. The user
should change the jobname to the name of the piping input filename (PIPE2 for this example) and enter the input
for the piping system to be analyzed.


The input for this job is shown below:


To connect the pipe to the structure, follow these procedures:
1 The user must tell CAESAR II the name of the structural steel file to include. From theInput
Spreadsheet select the Environment-Include Structural Files Menu option. The Include
Structural Files Dialog
2 Enter the name of the structural steel model to be included (SUPP2), by typing or browsing for it.
appears.
3 Define the connectivity between pipe and structural nodes using restraints with connecting nodes.
For the example problem, the node 115 in the pipe model should be tied to node 215 in the
structural model in the X and Z directions similarly; node 120 in the pipe model should be tied to


node 240 in the structural model. These connecting nodes may be defined from the piping spread-
sheet on any convenient element. Auxiliary field input for these two connections is shown as
follows:

If the pipe and structure do not plot properly relative to one-another then either:
Restraint Auxiliary Data
a) The connecting nodes were not defined correctly.
b) The CONNECT_GEOMETRY_THRU_CNODES directive was not set to YES in the
Configuration/Setup module.


The properly plotted pipe and structure is shown below:

Structural Steel Example #2 Plot
Once the pipe and structure are properly plotted relative to one-another, the piping input processor can be exited
and error checking performed. The error checker includes the pipe and structure together during checking. The
execution files that are written also include the structural data. In the output the pipe and structure are also
plotted together and can only be separated via the plot RANGE command.


The loads on the anchor at 5 are grossly excessive. The structural steel frame and pipe support structure as
shown are not satisfactory. Some displaced shape plots from the analysis are shown in the next figure:


Plot Showing Displacement
In this example, displacement of the structure is small relative to the displacement of the pipe. The pipe is
thermally expanding out away from the boiler nozzle and down, away from the boiler nozzle.


Plot Showing Displacement
Using the RANGE
Perhaps vertical springs at 30 and 35 would help, along with a repositioning of the structural supports vertically,
i.e. the support at 120 should be moved down so that its line of action in the X direction more closely coincides
with the center line of the pipe between 25 and 40.
command the structure is plotted without the pipe. The displaced shape of the structure
shows that the pipe is pulling the structure in the positive X direction at the top support and pushing the structure
in the negative X direction at the bottom support. These displacements will only result in higher loads on the
boiler nozzle. The vertical location of the structural supports should be studied more closely.


Estimate the X, Y, and Z stiffness of the structure at the point 1000. (Note that, in general, the stiffness of a
three-dimensional structure, condensed down to the stiffness of a single point, must be represented by a 66
stiffness matrix. As a first estimate, only the on-diagonal, translational stiffnesses are often estimated, as is being
done here.)

Select a job name (for example SUPP3) and enter the structural input processor as described earlier. The
structural input screen appears.
At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters (using menu commands and/or toolbars) that define the
model input. Input for the example is shown below:


Example I nput
At any time during input the user can generate plots of the model executing Operations-Plot. Once the user is
satisfied that the model has been entered properly, the model can be checked and saved with the File-Save
command. If no fatal errors are found, then the CAESAR II execution files are written. The model may now be
used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by
itself.)
The structural input processor generates a number of lists to be used for documentation and checking. Click the
List Options
Of particular interest in this model is the element orientation data that shows that the columns strong axis was
indeed rotated 90 degrees. Also the free-end-connection lists show that the specification entered for the beams
produced the desired results.
tab for various list types.


Elements and Properties


Nodal Fixities


Nodal Loads


Element Material Data


Element Geometry Data


Element of Orientation Data


When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu
The displacement and force report for the (Force Only) load case follows. Note that the structure is stiffer in the
X direction, even though the Z dimension is greater due to the orientation of the columns. The Force/Moment
report is particularly interesting given that all of the beams have pinned ends. Note that most of the beams carry
no load. This is because the transfer of the load to the beams in this model is due to rotations at the column ends,
and not translations. (Cross-braces would eliminate this problem and cause the beams to pick up more of the
load.) The 1000 end of the elements from 20-1000 and from 40-1000 carries a moment because it is not a pinned
end connection. 1000 is just a point at midspan for the application of the load.
. The user
should change the current jobname to that of the structural filename. When this is done the Analysis-Static menu
option should be selected. From this point structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis.
Output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.




Chapter 10 Buried Pipe Modeling
In This Chapter
Modeler Overview ................................................................ 10-2
Using the Underground Pipe Modeler .................................. 10-3
Notes on the Soil Model........................................................ 10-8
Recommended Procedures .................................................... 10-15
Example ................................................................................ 10-16

C H A P T E R 1 0

10-2 Buried Pipe Modeling

Modeler Overview
The CAESAR II Underground Pipe Modeler is designed to simplify user input of buried pipe data. This
processor will take an unburied layout and bury it. The Modeler
Allows the direct input of soil properties. The
performs the following functions for users:
Modeler
Breaks down straight and curved lengths of pipe to locate soil restraints.
contains the equations for buried pipe
stiffnesses that are outlined later in this chapter. These equations are used to calculate first the
stiffnesses on a per length of pipe basis, and then generate the restraints that simulate the discrete
buried pipe restraint.
CAESAR II
Breaks down straight and curved pipe so that when axial loads dominate, soil restraints are spaced
far apart.
uses a zone
concept to break down straight and curved sections. Where transverse bearing is a concern for
example near bends, tees, and entry/exit points soil restraints are located in close proximity.
Allows the direct input of user-defined soil stiffnesses on a per length of pipe basis. Input
parameters include axial, transverse, upward, and downward stiffnesses, as well as ultimate loads.
You can specify user-defined stiffnesses separately, or in conjunction with CAESAR II

s
automatically generated soil stiffnesses.


Using the Underground Pipe Modeler
You can start the Buried Pipe Modeler by selecting an existing unburied job, and then choosing Input-
Underground from the CAESAR II Main Menu. The Modeler is designed to read a standard CAESAR II
Input Data File that describes the basic layout of the piping system as if it was not buried. From this basic input
CAESAR II creates a second input data file that contains the buried pipe model. This second input file typically
contains a much larger number of elements and restraints than the first job. The first job that serves as the pat-
tern is termed the original job. The second file that contains the element mesh refinement and the buried pipe
restraints is termed the buried job. CAESAR II names the buried job by appending a B to the name of the
original job.
Note
When the
The original job must already exist and serves as the pattern for the buried pipe model building.
The modeler removes any restraints in the buried section during the process of creating the buried
model. Any additional restraints in the buried section can be entered in the resulting buried model. The
buried job, if it exists, is overwritten by the successful generation of a buried pipe model. It is the
buried job that is eventually run to compute displacements and stresses.
Buried Pipe Modeler is initially started, the following screen appears:

This spreadsheet is used to enter the buried element descriptions for the job. The buried element description
spreadsheet serves several functions:
allows you to define which part of the piping system is buried.
allows you to define mesh spacing at specific element ends.
allows the input of user-defined soil stiffnesses


Typical buried pipe displacements are considerably different than similar above ground displacements. Buried
pipe deforms laterally in areas immediately adjacent to changes in directions (i.e. bends and tees). In areas far
removed from bends and tees the deformation is primarily axial. The optimal size of an element (i.e. the distance
between a single FROM and a TO node) is very dependent on which of these deformation patterns is to be
modeled. Not having a continuous support model, CAESAR II
L
or the user, must locate additional point supports
along a line to simulate this continuous support. So for a given stiffness per unit length, either many, closely
spaced, low stiffness supports are added or a few, distant and high stiffness supports are added. Where the
deformation is lateral, smaller elements are needed to properly distribute the forces from the pipe to the soil.
The length over which the pipe deflects laterally is termed the lateral bearing length and can be calculated by
the equation:
b = 0.75() [4EI/Ktr]
Where:
0.25

E = Pipe modulus of elasticity
I = Pipe moment of inertia
Ktr = Transverse soil stiffness on a per length basis, (defined later)
CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local load distribution.
The bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The axial displacement lengths in a
piping system are called the Zone 3 lengths, and the intermediate lengths in a piping system are called the Zone
2 lengths. Zone 3 element lengths (to properly transmit axial loads) are computed by 100*Do, where Do is the
outside diameter of the piping. The Zone 2 mesh is comprised of up to 4 elements of increasing length; starting
at 1.5 times the length of a Zone 1 element at its Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last
which is 50*Do long at the Zone 3 end. A typical piping system, and how CAESAR II views this element
breakdown or mesh distribution is illustrated below. All pipe density is set to zero for all pipe identified as
buried, so that deadweight causes no bending around these point supports.

Zone Definitions


Note: CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe framing into an
elbow. It is your responsibility to tell CAESAR II
A critical part of the modeling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone 1
where the other Zone 1 areas are located in the piping
system.
or lateral
bearing regions
On either side of a change in direction.
. These bearing regions primarily occur:
For all pipes framing into an intersection.
At points where the pipe enters or leaves the soil.
Using any user-defined node within or near Zone 1.
The left side of the Buried Element Description Spreadsheet displays below:

Buried Element Description Spreadsheet
There are 13 columns in this spreadsheet. The eight not shown above carry the user-defined soil stiffnesses and
ultimate loads. The first two columns contain element node numbers for each piping element included in the
original system. The next three columns Soil Model No, From End Mesh Type, To End Mesh Type, are
discussed in detail below:
Soil Model No.This column is used to define which of the elements in the model are buried. A nonzero entry


in this column implies that the associated element is buried. A 1 in this column implies that the user wishes to
enter user defined stiffnesses, on a per length of pipe basis, at this point in the model. These stiffnesses must
follow in column numbers 6 through 13. Any number greater than 1 in the SOIL MODEL NO. column points
to a CAESAR II soil restraint model generated using the equations outlined later under Soil Models from user
entered soil data.
From/ To End Mesh Type
FROM TO SOIL FROM TO
A check in either of these columns implies that a Zone 1 should be placed at the
corresponding element end. For example:
NODE NODE MODEL MESH MESH
5 10 2
The element 5 to 10 is buried.

CAESAR II will generate the soil stiffnesses from user-defined soil dataset #2, and
the node 5 end will have a fine mesh so that lateral bearing will be properly modeled. Since CAESAR II
automatically places lateral bearing meshes adjacent to all buried elbows, the user must only be concerned with
the identification of buried tees and points of soil entry or exit. The figure below is illustrative:

Please note the following:
The user has separated the node numbers in the original piping system by varying the incremental
range by 20. This is so CAESAR II can maintain the sequence of node numbers for the added nodes.
This is not required but is useful in comprehending results. For very long runs, node increments of
100 may be helpful.


From/To Lateral Bearing mesh specifications are not needed for nodes 30, 110 and 130, since
CAESAR II
A lateral bearing mesh is not needed at 90 because there is no tendency for the model to deflect in
any direction NOT axial to the pipe.
places lateral bearing meshes on each side of a bend by default.
The tendency for lateral deflection must be defined for each element framing into an intersection
(node 50).
Commands available in this module are:
Button Description
File Open
Opens a new piping file as the original job.
File-Change
Buried Pipe J ob
Name
Renames the buried job (in the event that the user does not wish to use the CAESAR II
default of B appended to the original job name).
File- Print
Prints the element description data spreadsheet.
Soil Models
Allows the user to specify soil data for CAESAR II to use in generating one or more
soil restraint systems. This is described in detail below.
Convert
Converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and
adding soil restraints. The conversion process creates all of the necessary elements to
satisfy the Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and places restraints on the
elements in these zones accordingly. All elbows are broken down into at least two
curved sections, and very long radius elbows are broken down into segments whose
lengths are not longer than the elements in the immediately adjacent Zone 1 pipe
section. Node numbers are generated by adding 1 to the elements FROM node
number. CAESAR II checks before using a node number to make sure that it will be
unique in the model. All densities on buried pipe elements are zeroed to simulate the
continuous support of the pipe weight. A conversion log is also generated, which
details the process in full.


Notes on the Soil Model
The following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses and ultimate loads should be used only when
the analyst does not have better data or methods suited to the particular site and problem. Our soil restraint
modeling algorithms are based on the ideas presented by (1) The CAESAR II Basic Model L.C. Peng in his
paper entitled Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipelines, published in 1978 in Pipeline Industry and
(2) Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation from the Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the
American Lifelines Alliance http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf.
Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a yield stiffness.
The yield stiffness is typically set close to zero, i.e. once the ultimate load on the soil is reached there is no
further increase in load even though the displacement may continue. The two basic ultimate loads that must be
calculated to analyze buried pipe are the axial and transverse ultimate loads. Many researchers differentiate
between horizontal, upward, and downward transverse loads, but when the variance in predicted soil properties
and methods are considered, this differentiation is often not warranted. Note that CAESAR II
Once the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in these directions can be determined by
dividing the ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that the yield displacement is
related to both the buried depth and the pipe diameter. The ultimate loads and stiffnesses computed are on a
force per unit length of pipe basis.
allows the explicit
entry of these data if so desired.
Button Description

The user enters soil data by executing the Soil Models Command. This option allows the user to
specify the soil properties for the CAESAR II Buried Pipe Equations.
Note
Upon entry, the soil modeler dialog appears. Select either the
Valid soil model numbers start with 2. Soil model number 1 is reserved for user-defined soil
stiffnesses. Up to 15 different soil models may be entered for a single job.
CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng) or the American
LifeLines Alliance.


CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng)
Either the friction coefficient or the undrained shear strength may be left blank. Typically for clays the friction
coefficient would be left blank and would be automatically estimated by CAESAR II as Su/600 psf. Both sandy
soils and clay-like soils may be defined here.

The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. The
TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal strain is used to compute and print the theoretical
virtual anchor length.) These equations are:
Axial Ultimate Load (Fax
F
)
ax = D[ (2sH) + (pt) + (f
Where:
)(D/4) ]
0.4 for silt

= Friction coefficient, typical values are:
0.5 for sand
0.6 for gravel
0.6 for clay or Su
S
/600
u H = Buried depth to the top of pipe = Undrained shear strength (specified for clay-like soils)
D = Pipe diameter p = Pipe density
s
t = Pipe nominal wall thickness = Soil density

f = Fluid density


Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr
F
)
tr = 0.5s (H+D)
2
[tan(45 + /2)]
2
If S
OCM
u
is given (i.e. has a clay-like soil), then F
tr
as calculated above is multiplied by S
u
Where:
/250 psf.

27-45 for sand
= Angle of internal friction, typical values are:
26-35 for silt
0 for clay
The OCM is an artificial
Notes on the Overburden Compaction Multiplier (OCM)
CAESAR II term used to allow you to take a conservative approach when modeling
uncertain soil response. Since a higher stiffness will generally produce conservative results, you may wish to
increase the transverse soil stiffness, CAESAR II
Users have reduced the OCM (from its default of 8) to values ranging from 5 to 7, depending on the degree of
compaction of the backfill. There is no theory which suggests that the OCM cannot equal 1.0.
uses the OCM to serve this purpose.
For a strict implementation of Peng's Theory as discussed in his articles (April 78 and May 78 issue of Pipeline
Industry) you should use a value of 1.0 for the OCM.
Yield Displacement (yd
y
):
d = Yield Displacement Factor(H+D)
Note:
Axial Stiffness (K
The Yield Displacement Factor defaults to 0.015(suggested for H =3D).
ax
K
) on a per length of pipe basis:
ax=Fax / y
Transverse Stiffness (K
d
tr
K
) on a per length of pipe basis:
tr=Ftr / y
Once you click
d
OK

, the soil data is saved in a file entitled .SOI.
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model
The following information references the American Lifelines Alliance document "Guidelines for the Design of
Buried Steel Pipe " Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation
http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf. This document provides bilinear stiffness of
soil for axial, lateral, uplift and bearing. Each stiffness term has a component associated with sandy soils
(subscripted q) and a component associated with clays (subscripted c). Data can be entered for pure granular
soils and pure clays.
Soil stiffness for both clay and sand (cohesive and granular soils, respectively) are defined through the following
parameters supplied by the user:
= c
soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill
= H
soil depth to top of pipe (this is converted by C2 to depth to pipe centerline in ALA calculations)


=
effective unit weight of soil
=
total dry unit weight of fill
=
0
K
coefficient of earth pressure at rest (can be calculated based on internal friction angle of soil)
= f
coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at the
soil-pipe interface
=
internal friction angle of soil

Elastic range of soil is either fixed or a function of D & H with limits based on D.
Yield Displacement Factor Entry Limited by
t (dT) Axial Length units
p (dP) Lateral Multiple of D 0.04(H+D/2)
qu (dQu) Upward Multiple of H
Minimum
qu (dQu) Upward Multiple of D
qd (dQd) Downward Multiple of D


Axial:
( )
tan 1
2
0
K DH c D T
u
+ + =

=
u
T
peak friction force at pipe-soil interface maximum axial soil force per unit length that can be
transmitted to pipe)

= D
pipe OD

=
adhesion factor (for clays only)
1
695 . 0
1
274 . 0
123 . 0 608 . 0
3 2
+
+
+
=
c c
c
where c is in ksf

= c
soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill (undrained shear strength)

= H
depth of cover to pipe centerline

=
effective unit weight of soil

=
0
K
coefficient of earth pressure at rest
The ratio of the horizontal effective stress acting on a supporting structure and the vertical effective stress in the
soil at that point. At rest indicates the pipe does not move for this calculation.

=
interface angle of friction for pipe and soil,
f =

= f
coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at
the soil-pipe interface

Pipe Coating f
Concrete 1.0
Coal Tar 0.9
Rough Steel 0.8
Smooth Steel 0.7
Fusion Bonded Epoxy 0.6
Polyethylene 0.6


=
internal friction angle of soil
=
t
axial displacement to develop

u
T
= 0.1 inch for dense sand
= 0.2 inch for loose sand
= 0.3 inch for stiff clay
= 0.4 inch for soft clay
Lateral:
HD N cD N P
qh ch u
+ =

=
u
P
maximum horizontal soil bearing capacity (maximum lateral soil force per unit length that can be
transmitted to pipe)
=
ch
N
horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)
=
qh
N
horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for =0)
9
) 1 ( ) 1 (
3 2

+
+
+
+ + =
x
d
x
c
bx a N
ch

) ( ) ( ) ( ) (
4 3 2
x e x d x c x b a N
qh
+ + + + =

Factor x a b c d e
Nch 0 H/D 6.752 0.065 -11.063 7.119 --
Nqh 20 H/D 2.399 0.439 -0.03 1.059E-3 -1.754E-5
Nqh 25 H/D 3.332 0.839 -0.090 5.606E-3 -1.319E-4
Nqh 30 H/D 4.565 1.234 -0.089 4.275E-3 -9.159E-5
Nqh 35 H/D 6.816 2.019 -0.146 7.651E-3 -1.683E-4
Nqh 40 H/D 10.959 1.783 0.045 -5.425E-3 -1.153E-4
Nqh 45 H/D 17.658 3.309 0.048 -6.443E-3 -1.299E-4
Nqh can be interpolated for between 20and 45
=
p
horizontal displacement to develop
u
P

D
D
H 01 . 0 )
2
( 04 . 0 + =
to 0.15D


Vertical Uplift:
HD N cD N Qu
qv cv
+ =

=
u
Q
maximum vertical upward soil bearing capacity (maximum vertical uplift soil force per unit length
that can be transmitted to pipe)
=
cv
N
vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)
=
qv
N
vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for
q qv
N
D
H
N = )
44
(
)
10 ) ( 2 =
D
H
N
cv
applicable for (H/D)10
q qv
N
D
H
N = )
44
(

)
2
45 ( tan ) tan exp(
2

+ =
q
N

=
qu
vertical displacement to develop
u
Q

= 0.01H to 0.02H for dense to loose sands < 0.1D
= 0.1H to 0.2H for stiff to soft clays < 0.2D
Vertical Bearing:
2
2
D
N HD N cD N Q
q c d

+ + =

=
d
Q
maximum vertical bearing soil force per unit length that can be transmitted to pipe

c
N
,
q
N
,
=
N
vertical downward soil bearing capacity factors
} 1 )
2
001 . 0
45 ( tan )] 001 . 0 tan( )]{exp[ 001 . 0 [cot(
2
+
+ + + =

c
N

)
2
45 ( tan ) tan exp(
2

+ =
q
N

) 5 . 2 18 . 0 (
=

e N

=
total dry unit weight of fill
=
qd
vertical displacement to develop
d
Q

= 0.1D for granular soils
= 0.2D for cohesive soils


Recommended Procedures
The recommended procedure for using the buried pipe modeler is outlined below:
1 Select the original unburied job and enter the buried pipe modeler. The original job must already
exist, and will serve as the basis for the pipe model. The original model need only contain the basic
geometry of the piping system. The modeler will remove any existing restraints in the buried
portion. Add any additional underground restraints ( e.g. thrust block) to the buried model. Rename
the buried job if the CAESAR II default name (JOBNAME
2 Enter the soil data using Soil Models or collect any user-defined soil data.
B) is not appropriate.
3 Describe the sections of the piping system that are buried, and define any required fine mesh areas
using the buried element data spreadsheet or enter user-defined soil data (columns 6-13).
4 Convert the original model into the buried model by clicking Convert Input
5 Exit the
. This step produces a
detailed description of the conversion.
Buried Pipe Modeler and return to the CAESAR II Main Menu
A buried-pipe example problem is shown in the following section. This example illustrates the features of the
modeler and should in no-way be taken as a guide for recommended underground piping design.
. From here the user may
review and edit the buried model and perform the analysis of the buried pipe job.


Example

The following input listing represents theunburied model shown above.

Terminal nodes 100 and 1900 are above ground. Nodes 1250 and 1650 (on the sloped runs) mark the soil entry
and exit points.


Soil Model Number 2, a sandy soil, is entered.

Elements 1250-1300 through 1600-1650 are buried using soil model number 2. Zone 1 meshing is indicated at
the entry and exit points.


Clicking Convert on the toolbar to begins the conversion to a buried model.


The screen listing can also be printed.


The original unburied model is shown along with the "buried" model below. Note the added restraints around the
elbows and along the straight runs.

Note the bi-linear restraints added to the buried model. The stiffness used is based upon the distance between
nodes.


Note that the first buried element, 1250-1251, has no density.


The buried job can now be analyzed.

Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance
In This Chapter
Equipment and Component Evaluation ................................ 11-2
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ............................ 11-3
Bend Stress Intensification Factors ....................................... 11-6
WRC 107 Vessel Stresses ..................................................... 11-9
WRC Bulletin 297 ................................................................. 11-14
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations ...................................... 11-15
Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines B31G ................ 11-23
Expansion J oint Rating ......................................................... 11-27
Structural Steel Checks - AISC ............................................. 11-34
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ........................................... 11-41
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ............................................... 11-48
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ..................................... 11-54
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ............................... 11-56
Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters
............................................................................................... 11-61
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ....... 11-62

C H A P T E R 1 1

11-2 Equipment Component and Compliance

Equipment and Component Evaluation
The CAESAR II Equipment and Component Compliance Analytical Modules are executed from the
CAESAR II Main Menu using the Analysis
Often suction (inlet), discharge (exhaust), and extraction lines are analyzed for forces and moments in separate
runs of a pipe stress program. Once all of the loadings for a particular piece of equipment are computed, the
equipment program is executed to determine if these loads are acceptable in accordance with the governing code.
The user enters the equipments basic geometry and the loads on its nozzles computed from the piping program.
The equipment analysis determines if these loads are excessive.
Menu. Vessels, flanges, turbines, compressors, pumps and heat
exchangers can be checked for excessive piping loads in accordance with appropriate standards. Input is via
tabbed spreadsheets, and help screens are available for each data cell (launched with [F1] or the ? key). Output
reports can be sent to the printer, terminal or files.
One convenient feature of the CAESAR II Equipment programs is that nozzles on equipment can be analyzed
separately. Often times a user will only have suction side loads, and often the particular dimensions of the pump
are unknown, or are difficult to obtain. In these cases, CAESAR II accepts zeros or no-entries for the unknown
data and will still generate a single-nozzle equipment check report. Therefore, while overall compliance may
not be evaluated, the user can still check the individual nozzle limits. This is a valuable tool to have, as in this
case the user is looking more for load guidance, rather than for some fixed or precise limit on allowables.

Analysis Menu
All of these program modules share the same interface for easy transition. The individual modules are described
following section.


Intersection Stress Intensification Factors
With this module, intersection stress intensification factors (SIFs) can be computed for any of the three-pipe type
intersections available in CAESAR II:

I ntersection Types


A sample input spreadsheet is shown below.

I ntersection Stress I ntensification Factors
Stress intensification factors are reported for a range of different configuration values.


I ntersection Stress I ntensification Factors Report


Bend Stress Intensification Factors
This module provides a scratch pad for determining stress intensification factors (SIFs) for various bend
configurations under different codes.
Bend stress intensification factors can be computed for
Pipe bends without any additional attachments. These calculations are done exactly according to the
piping code being used.
Mitered pipe bends. These calculations are done exactly according to the piping code being used.
Pipe bends with a trunnion attachment. These calculations are taken from the paper Stress Indices
for Piping Elbows with Trunnion Attachments for Moment and Axial Loads, by Hankinson,
Budlong and Albano, in the PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The bend stress intensification factor input spreadsheet is shown below:

Bend Stress I ntensification Spreadsheet
Input here is fairly straight forward; if there is a question about a particular data entry, the help screens should be
queried. In most cases data that does not apply is left blank. For example, to review the SIFs for a bend that


does not have a trunnion, the three trunnion related input fields should be left blank.

Bend Stress I ntensification Factors - Trunnion
Pressure Stiffening
The pressure stiffening option in the input is provided so you can see the effect that pressure stiffening has on the
bends flexibility factor and stress intensification factor. This option is controlled by you in CAESAR II
Pressure stiffening has its most significant effect in larger diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment
(compressors). Including pressure stiffening where it is not included by default will draw more of the system
moment to the nozzle adjacent to the bend.
via the
setup file, but is most commonly left to the default condition. The default is different for each piping code
because some of the codes mention pressure stiffening explicitly and some do not.


Flanges Attached to Bend Ends
This is the number of rigid fittings that are attached to the end of the bend preventing the ovalization of the bend.
It is the ovalization that provides for a large amount of the bends flexibility. BS-806 The British Power Piping
Code recommends that flanges or valves (or any rigid cross-sectional fitting) that are within two diameters of the
ending weld point of the bend be considered as being attached to the end of the bend for this calculation.

Bends with Trunnions
There are limits that must be satisfied before SIFs can be calculated on trunnions. These limits come directly
from the paper by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, and they are:
t/T 0.2 and t/T
D/T
2.0
20 and D/T
d/D
60
0.3 and d/D
Where:
0.8
t = Wall Thickness of the Trunnion
T = Wall Thickness of the Bend
d = Outside Diameter of the Trunnion
D = Outside Diameter of the Bend

Stress Concentrations and Intensification
The stress intensification calculation for bends with trunnions is based on the relationship between the ASME
NB stress indices C
2
, K
2
(m)(i) = (C
, and the B31 code i factor or stress intensification factor. That relationship has long
been taken to be
2)(K2
Where:
)
m = multiplier, usually either 1.7 or 2.
i = B31 stress intensification factor
C2
K
= ASME NB secondary stress index
2
The peak stress index (K2) is commonly known as the stress concentration factor, and is so-called in
= ASME NB peak stress index
CAESAR II.
Because most piping components are formed without crude notches, gross imperfections or other anomalies, the
peak stress index is kept well in control. Where a smooth transition radius is provided which is at least t/2, where
(t) is the characteristic thickness of the part, the peak stress index is typically taken as 1.0. At unfinished welds,
sockets, and where no transition radius is provided the peak stress index approaches values of 2.0.
Simply put, this factor is the ratio of the highest point stress at an intensification (i.e. at an
intersection or an elbow) and the nominal local computed stress at the same point. Peak stresses typically only
exist in a very small volume of material, on the order of fractions of the wall thickness of the part.
Note If you enter a trunnion (where there will be a weld between the trunnion and the elbow), and
you do not enter a stress concentration factor (the third input for the trunnion), CAESAR II

assumes a
stress concentration factor of 2.0.


WRC 107 Vessel Stresses
The Welding Research Council Bulletin 107 (WRC 107) has been used extensively since 1965 by design
engineers to estimate local stresses in vessel/attachment junctions. There are 3 editions of the WRC 107 bulletin
available in the program, set the default using Configure/Setup

. The WRC 107 Bulletin provides an analytical
tool to evaluate the vessel stresses in the immediate vicinity of a nozzle. You can use this method to compute the
stresses at both the inner and outer surfaces of the vessel wall, and report the stresses in the longitudinal and
circumferential axes of the vessel/nozzle intersection. The convention adopted by WRC 107 to define the
applicable orientations of the applied loads and stresses for both spherical and cylindrical vessels display below.

Spherical Shells Cylindrical Shells
Defining WRC Axes:
P-axis: Along Nozzle centerline and positive entering vessel.
M1-axis: Perpendicular to nozzle centerline along convenient
global axis.
M2-axis: Cross P-axis into M1 axis and the result is M2-axis.
Defining WRC Axes:
P-axis: Along Nozzle centerline and positive entering vessel.
MC-axis: Along vessel centerline and positive to correspond
with any parallel global axis.
M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with MC axis and result is ML-axis.
Defining WRC Stress Points:
uupper, stress on outside of vessel wall at junction.
llower, stress on inside of vessel at junction.
A-Position on vessel at junction along negative M1 axis.
B-Position on vessel at junction along positive M2 axis.
C-Position on vessel at junction along positive M2 axis.
D-Position on vessel at junction along negative M2 axis.
Defining WRC Stress Points:
u-upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at junction.
l-lower, means stress on inside of vessel at junction.
A-Position on vessel at junction along negative MC axis.
B-Position on vessel at junction, along positive MC axis.
C-Position on vessel at junction, along positive ML axis.
D-Position on vessel at junction, along negative ML axis.
Note: Shear axis "VC" is parallel, and in the same direction
as the bending axis "ML." Shear axis "VL" is parallel, and in
the opposite direction as the bending axis "MC."


It has also been a common practice to use WRC 107 to conservatively estimate vessel shell stress state at the
edge of a reinforcing pad, if any. The stress state in the vessel wall when the nozzle has a reinforcing pad can be
estimated by considering a solid plug, with an outside diameter equal to the O.D. of the reinforcing pad,
subjected to the same nozzle loading.
Note:
WRC 107 should probably not be used when the nozzle is very light or when the parameters in the WRC 107
data curves are unreasonably exceeded. Output from WRC 107 includes the figure numbers for the curves
accessed, the curve abscissa, and the values retrieved. You should check these outputs against the actual curve in
WRC 107 to get a feel for the accuracy of the stresses calculated. For example, if parameters for a particular
problem are always near or past the end of the figures curve data, then the calculated stresses may not be
reliable.
Before attempting to use WRC 107 to evaluate the stress state of any nozzle/vessel junction, you
should always verify that the geometric restrictions limiting the application of WRC 107 are not
exceeded. These vary according to the attachment and vessel types, you should refer to the WRC 107
bulletin directory for this information.

Enable WRC 107 by clicking ANALYSIS - WRC 107/297 from the Main Menu. The WRC 107/297 window
appears.

Analysis-WRC 107


The WRC 107/297 Analysis module allows multiple analyses to be saved inside the same file. The Job
Explorer window lists each analysis contained in the job, sorted by analysis type: WRC-107 or WRC-297. The
items in the list are created by combining the items description and item number, which can be changed in the
data input window. The Job Explorer window is a docking window that can be hidden and pinned open by
clicking the Pushpin

in the upper right corner.
The WRC 107/297 Toolbar enables users to select a specific analysis type, launch an analysis of data, or output
analysis results to MS Word.

Button Description

Enables you to define a data set as a WRC-107 analysis.

Enables you to define a data set as a WRC-297 analysis.

Starts the analysis and displays the results in the programs window.

Performs the initial WRC 107 calculation and summation and sends the result to MicroSoft Word
New analyses can be added to the job by clicking the appropriate analysis type button 107or 297 on the toolbar.
An analysis can be removed from the job by selecting it in the Job Explorer window, then clicking the Pencil
Eraser button on the toolbar. To display an analysis in the Data Input window (the grid-like window on the
right) select it from the list in theJob Explorer
You can navigate through the
window on the left.
Data Input window by clicking on a cell with the mouse, or by using the
keyboard. The Tab key moves the cursor from the left cell (label) to the right cell (value), then to the next left
cell label, and so on. The Up/Down Arrow keys move through the cells. You can enter data when the focus is
either on a label or value. When a cell has a list selection such as an attachment type, display the list by clicking
on the cell, and using the Alt + Down Arrow
The analysis results and the graphical representation display on the
key combination, or by clicking the drop list arrow with the
mouse.
Analysis and Drawing tabs on the right side
of the Data Input window. These two tabs are also docking panes that can be opened or hidden by clicking on
the Pushpin in the upper right corner. The two tabs automatically update after each change in the Data Input
window, even if they are hidden.


Below displays a sample Analysis report, you can undock, move, and resize the report according to preference.

Analysis Report
Nozzle curves in the WRC Bulletin 107 cover essentially all applications of nozzles in vessels or piping;
however, should any of the interpolation parameters, i.e. Beta, etc. fall outside the limits of the available curves,
some extrapolation of the WRC method must be used. The current default is to use the last value in the particular
WRC table. If you wish to control the extrapolation methodology interactively, you may do so by changing the
WRC 107 default from USE LAST CURVE VALUE to INTERACTIVE CONTROL on the Computation
Control tab located inside the Configure-Setup module of the Main Menu or directly in the WRC 107 input
file, on the Vessel Data

tab.
WRC 107 Stress Summations
Because the stresses computed by WRC 107 are highly localized, they do not fall immediately under the B31
code rules as defined by B31.1 or B31.3. Appendix 4-1 of ASME Section VIII, Division 2 Mandatory Design
Based on Stress Analysis does however provide a detailed approach for dealing with these local stresses. The
analysis procedure outlined in the aforementioned code is used in CAESAR II
P
to perform the stress evaluation. In
order to evaluate the stresses through an elastic analysis, three stress combinations (summations) must be made:
P
m

m
+P
l
+P
P
b

m
+P
l
+P
b
Where P
+Q
m
is defined as the general membrane stress due to internal pressure removed from discontinuities, and
can be estimated for the vessel wall from the expression (PD) / (4t) for the longitudinal component and (PD) /


(2t) for the hoop component, where P is the design pressure of the system. The allowable for P
m
is kS
mh
where
S
mh
is the allowable stress intensity (See the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for definition). The value of
k can be taken from Table AD-150.1 of the code (which ranges from 1.0 for sustained loads to 1.2 for sustained
plus wind loads or sustained plus earthquake loads). P
l
is the local membrane stress at the junction due to the
sustained piping loads, P
b
is the local bending stress (defined as zero at the nozzle to vessel connections per
Section VIII, Division 2 of ASME Code), while Q is defined as the secondary stress, due to thermal expansion
piping loads, or the bending stress due to internal pressure thrust and sustained piping loads. The allowable stress
intensity for the second stress combination is 1.5kS
mh
, as defined by the Figure 4-130.1 of the Code, while S
mh
is
the hot stress intensity allowable at the given design temperature. Both P
l
and Q will be calculated by the WRC
107 program. The third combination actually defines the range of the stress intensity, and its allowable is
limited to 1.5(S
mc
+S
mh
This summation is done automatically following the WRC 107 analysis. This calculation provides a comparison
of the stress intensities to the entered allowables, along with a corresponding PASS-FAIL ruling. Failed items
display in red.
). See the Technical Reference Manual for a detailed discussion.

WRC 107 Analysis Module - Drawing Tab


WRC Bulletin 297
Published in August of 1984, Welding Research Council (WRC) 297 attempts to extend the existing analysis
tools for the evaluation of stresses in cylinder-to-cylinder intersections. WRC 297 differs from the widely used
WRC 107 primarily in that WRC 297 is designed for larger d/D ratios (up to 0.5), and that WRC 297 also
computes stresses in the nozzle and the vessel. (WRC 107 only computes stresses in the vessel.)
The CAESAR II WRC 297 module shares the same interface with WRC 107. To enable the WRC 297 analysis,
click the 297 button located near the upper-left corner of the window. The module provides spreadsheets for
vessel data, nozzle data, and imposed loads. Vessel and Nozzle data fields function the same way as those in
WRC 107. Currently WRC 297 supports one set of loads. The loads may be entered in either Global
CAESAR II convention, or in the Local WRC 107 coordinate system. If Global CAESAR II convention is
selected vessel and nozzle direction cosines must be present in order to convert the loads into the Local WRC
297
The
convention as discussed in the WRC 297 bulletin.
CAESAR II version of WRC 297 also adds the pressure component of the stress using Lames equations,
multiplied by the stress intensification factors found in ASME Section VIII, Div. 2, Table AD-560.7. The
pressure stress calculation is not a part of the WRC 297 bulletin, but is added here as a convenience for the user.
Note CAESAR II also uses, through the piping input processor, the nozzle flexibility calculations
described in WRC 297 refer to Chapter 3 of the Technical Reference Manual
When provided with the necessary input,
.
CAESAR II

calculates the stress components at the four locations on the
vessel around the nozzle and also the corresponding locations on the nozzle. Stresses are calculated on both the
outer and inner surfaces (upper and lower). These stress components are resolved into stress intensities at these
16 points around the connection. Refer to the WRC 107 discussion for more information on the allowable limits
for these stresses and output processing.


Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations
The Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations are started by selecting the Main Menu option ANALYSIS-FLANGES
There have been primarily two different ways to calculate stress and one way to estimate leakage for flanges that
have received general application over the past 20 years. The stress calculation methods are from the following
sources:
.
ASME Section VIII
ANSI B16.5 Rating Tables
The leakage calculations were also based on the B16.5 rating table approach. Leakage is a function of the
relative stiffnesses of the flange, gasket and bolting. Using the B16.5 estimated stress calculations to predict
leakage does not consider the gasket type, stiffness of the flange, or the stiffness of the bolting. Using B16.5 to
estimate leakage makes the tendency to leak proportional to the allowable stress in the flange, i.e. a flange with a
higher allowable will be able to resist higher moments without leakage. Leakage is very weakly tied to allowable
stress, if at all.
The CAESAR II Flange Leakage Calculation
Several trends have been noticed as flange calculations have been made:
is our first attempt to improve upon the solution of this difficult
analysis problem. Equations were written to model the flexibility of the annular plate that is the flange, and its
ability to rotate under moment, axial force, and pressure. The results compare favorably with three dimensional
finite element analysis of the flange junction. These correlations assume that the distance between the inside
diameter of the flange and the center of the effective gasket loading diameter is smaller than the distance
between the effective gasket loading diameter and the bolt circle diameter, i.e. that (G-ID) <(BC-G), where, G is
the effective gasket loading diameter, ID is the inside diameter of the flange, and BC is the diameter of the bolt
circle.
The thinner the flange, the greater the tendency to leak.
Larger diameter flanges have a greater tendency to leak.
Stiffer gaskets have a greater tendency to leak.
Leakage is a function of bolt tightening stress.
Input for the Flange Module is broken into four sections. The first section describes flange geometry.


Flange Analysis


The second section contains data on the bolts and gasket.

Bolts and Gasket


The third section is used to enter material and stress-related data.

Material and Stress Data


The fourth section contains the imposed loads.

I mposed Loads
Bolt Tightening Stress Notes
This is a critical item for leakage determination and for computing stresses in the flange. The ASME Code bases
its stress calculations on a prespecified, fixed equation for the bolt stress. The resulting value is however often
not related to the actual tightening stress that appears in the flange when the bolts are tightened. For this reason,
the initial bolt stress input field that appears in the first section of data input, Bolt Initial Tightening Stress, is


used only for the flexibility/leakage determination. The value for the bolt tightening stress used in the ASME
Flange Stress Calculations is as defined by the ASME Code:
Bolt Load = Hydrostatic End Force + Force for Leaktight Joint
If the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress field is left blank, CAESAR II uses the value

where 45,000 psi is a constant and d is the nominal diameter of the bolt (correction is made for metric units).
This is a rule of thumb tightening stress that will typically be applied by field personnel tightening the bolts. This
computed value is printed in the output from the flange program. It is interesting to compare this value to the
bolt stress printed in the ASME stress report (also in the output). It is not unusual for the rule-of-thumb
tightening stress to be larger than the ASME required stress. When the ASME required stress is entered into the
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress

data field, a comparison of the leakage safety factors can be made and the
sensitivity of the joint to the tightening torque can be ascertained. Users are strongly encouraged to play with
these numbers to get a feel for the relationship between all of the factors involved.
Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler
Only the following input parameters are required to get a leakage report. These parameters include
Flange Inside Diameter
Flange Thickness
Bolt Circle Diameter
Number Of Bolts
Bolt Diameter
Effective Gasket Diameter
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness
Effective Gasket Width
Leak Pressure Ratio
Effective Gasket Modulus
Externally Applied Moment
Externally Applied Force
Pressure
The help screens (press [F1] or ? at the data cell) are very useful for all of the input items and should be used
liberally here when there are questions. Unique input cells are discussed as follows:
Leak Pressure Ratio
This value is taken directly from Table 2-5.1 in the ASME Section VIII code. This table is reproduced in the
help screens. This value is more commonly recognized as m, and is termed the Gasket Factor in the ASME
code. This is a very important number for leakage determination, as it represents the ratio of the pressure
required to prevent leakage over the line pressure.


Effective Gasket Modulus
Typical values are between 300,000 and 400,000 psi for spiral wound gaskets. The higher the modulus the
greater the tendency for the program to predict leakage. Errors on the high side when estimating this value will
lead to a more conservative design.
Flange Rating
This is an optional input, but results in some very interesting output. As mentioned above, it has been a widely
used practice in the industry to use the ANSI B16.5 and API 605 temperature/pressure rating tables as a gauge
for leakage. Because these rating tables are based on allowable stresses, and were not intended for leakage
prediction, the leakage predictions that resulted were a function of the allowable stress for the flange material,
and not the flexibility, i.e. modulus of elasticity of the flange. To give the user a feel for this old practice, the
minimum and maximum rating table values from ANSI and API were stored and are used to print minimum and
maximum leakage safety factors that would be predicted from this method. Example output that the user will get
upon entering the flange rating is shown as follows:
EQUIVALENT PRESSURE MODEL -
Equivalent Pressure (lb./sq.in.) 1639.85
ANSI/API Min Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1080.00
ANSI/API Max Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1815.00
This output shows that leakage, according to this older method, occurred if a carbon steel flange was used, and
leakage did not occur if an alloy flange was used. (Of course both flanges would have essentially the same
flexibility tendency to leak.)
The following input parameters are used only for the ASME Section VIII Division 1 stress calculations:
Flange Type
Flange Outside Diameter
Design Temperature
Small End Hub Thickness
Large End Hub Thickness
Hub Length
Flange Allowables
Bolt Allowables
Gasket Seating Stress
Optional Allowable Multipliers
Flange Face & Gasket Dimensions
The flange type can be selected from the icons on the first spreadsheet.
Material allowables may be acquired from the Section VIII, Division 1 material library that is accessed from the
pull-down list.


An input listing for a typical flange analysis is shown below:
CA E S A R I I MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO
Flange Inside Diameter [B](in.) 30.560
Flange Thickness [t](in.) 4.060
Flange Rating (Optional) 300.000

Bolt Circle Diameter (in.) 38.500
Number of Bolts 32.000
Bolt Diameter (in.) 1.500
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress(lb./sq.in.)

Effective Gasket Diameter [G] (in.) 33.888
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness (in.) 0.063
Basic Gasket Width [b0] (in.) 0.375
Leak Pressure Ratio [m] 2.750
Effective Gasket Modulus(b./sq.in.) 300,000.000

Externally Applied Moment (optional)(in.lb.) 24,000.000
Externally Applied Force (optional)(lb.) 1,000.000
Pressure [P](lb./sq.in.) 400.000

The following inputs are required only if you wish to perform stress calcs as per Sect VIII Div. 1

Flange Type (1-8, see ?-Help or Alt-P to plot) 1.000
Flange Outside Diameter [A](in.) 41.500
Design TemperatureF 650.000

Small End Hub Thickness [g0](in.) 1.690
Large End Hub Thickness [g1](in.) 3.440
Hub Length [h](in.) 6.620

Flange Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
Flange Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Bolt Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Bolt Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Gasket Seating Stress [y](lb./sq.in.) 3,700.000

Flange Allowable Stress Multiplier 1.000
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier (VIII Div 2 4-1411.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N

Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt OD(in.) 34.500
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID(in.) 33.000
Gasket Outer Diameter (in.) 36.000
Gasket Inner Diameter (in.) 33.000
Nubbin Width (in.)
Facing Sketch 1.000
Facing Column 2.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N


Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines B31G
The B31G criterion provides a methodology whereby corroded pipelines can be evaluated to determine when
specific pipe segments must be replaced. The original B31G document incorporates a healthy dose of
conservatism and as a result, additional work has been performed to modify the original criteria. This additional
work can be found in project report PR-3805, by Battelle, Inc. The details of the original B31G criteria as well as
the modified methods are discussed in detail in this report.
CAESAR II implements these B31G computations from the Main Menu select ANALYSIS-B31G. The user is then
presented with two spreadsheets on which the problem specific data can be entered.
CAESAR II
These values are
determines the following values according to the original B31G criteria and four modified methods.
the hoop stress to cause failure
the maximum allowed operating pressure
the maximum allowed flaw length
The four modified methods vary in the manner in which the corroded area is estimated. These methods are
.85dLThe corroded area is approximated as 0.85 times the maximum pit depth times the flaw
length.
ExactThe corroded area is determined numerically using the trapezoid method.
EquivalentThe corroded area is determined by multiplying the average pit depth by the flaw
length. Additionally, an equivalent flaw length (flaw length * average pit depth / maximum pit
depth) is used in the computation of the Folias factor.
EffectiveThis method also uses a numerical trapezoid summation, however, various sub lengths
of the total flaw length are used to arrive at a worst case condition. Note that if the sub length which
produces the worst case coincides with the total length, the Exact and Effective methods yield the
same result.
The input screens from the B31G processor are shown below. All input cells have associated help text for user
convenience. Note that most of the data required by this processor is acquired through actual field
measurements.


Data Spreadsheet


A maximum of twenty pit measurements may be entered on theMeasurements spreadsheet.

Measurements Spreadsheet


Once the data has been entered, the Analyze menu option initiates the computations. A typical output report is
shown as follows.

The data in the input and the resulting output are consistent with the example from the PR-3-805 report on page
B-19. For additional information or backup on these computations, an intermediate computation file is
generated.
For additional information on this processor, please refer to either the B31G document or the Battelle project
report PR-3-805.


Expansion Joint Rating
CAESAR II provides a computation module which computes a limit for the total displacement per corrugation of
an expansion joint. According to EJ MA (Expansion J oint Manufacturers Association), the maximum permitted
amount of axial movement per corrugation is defined as e
rated
e
where
x
+e
y
+e
q
<e
The terms in the above equation are defined as:
rated

e
x
e
=The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed axial movements.
y
e
=The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed lateral deflections.
q
e
=The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed angular rotation, i.e. bending.
rated
In addition, EJ MA states,
=The maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation. This value should be obtained from
the Expansion J oint Manufacturers catalog.
Also, [as an expansion joint is rotated or deflected laterally] it should be noted that one side of the bellows
attains a larger projected area than the opposite side. Under the action of the applied pressure, unbalanced forces
are set up which tend to distort the expansion joint further. In order to control the effects of these two factors a
second limit is established by the manufacturer upon the amount of angular rotation and/or lateral deflection
which may be imposed upon the expansion joint. This limit may be less than the rated movement. Therefore, in
the selection of an expansion joint, care must be exercised to avoid exceeding either of these manufacturers
limits.
This CAESAR II
The expansion joint rating module can be entered by selecting
computation module is provided to assist the expansion joint user in satisfying these limitations.
This module computes the terms defined in the above equation and the movement of the joint ends relative to
each other. These relative movements are reported in both the local joint coordinate system and the global
coordinate system.
MAIN MENU ANALYSIS -EXPANSION JOINT RATING
The user is then presented with two input spreadsheets on which the joint geometry and end displacements are
specified.
option.


Geometry Spreadsheet


Displacements and Rotation



A report displaying both the input echo and the output calculations are shown as follows. The units used for the
coordinate and displacement values are the length units defined in the active units file. Rotations are in units of
degrees.


C A E S A R I I MI SCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO

EJ MA EXPANSI ON J OI NT RATI NG

Node Number f or FROM end 120. 000
Node Number f or TO end 125. 000
Number of Convol ut i ons 4. 000
Fl exi bl e J oi nt Lengt h ( i n. ) 4. 447
Ef f ect i ve Di amet er ( i n. ) 4. 996

X Coor di nat e of f r om end ( i n. ) . 000
Y Coor di nat e of f r om end ( i n. ) . 000
Z Coor di nat e of f r om end ( i n. ) . 000

X Coor di nat e of t o end ( i n. ) 4. 447

X Di spl acement of f r om end ( i n. ) . 300
Y Di spl acement of f r om end ( i n. ) . 250
Z Di spl acement of f r om end ( i n. ) . 000
X Rot at i on of f r om end ( deg) . 000
Y Rot at i on of f r om end ( deg) 1. 222
Z Rot at i on of f r om end ( deg) . 030
X Di spl acement of t o end ( i n. ) - . 100
Y Di spl acement of t o end ( i n. ) . 120
Z Di spl acement of t o end ( i n. ) . 000
X Rot at i on of t o end ( deg) . 000
Y Rot at i on of t o end ( deg) - . 020
Z Rot at i on of t o end ( deg) . 890

OUTPUT:
AXI AL DI SPLACEMENTS PER CONVOLUTI ON

Axi al Di spl acement . 100
Axi al Di spl acement due t o Lat er al . 133
Axi al Di spl acement due t o Rot at i on. 016
Axi al Di spl acement TOTAL. 250

RELATI VE MOVEMENTS OF END i WI TH RESPECT TO END j
( Local J oi nt Coor di nat e Syst em)

Rel at i ve Axi al Di spl acement , x. 401
Rel at i ve Lat er al Di spl acement , y. 158
Rel at i ve Bendi ng, t het a ( deg) 1. 511
Rel at i ve Tor si on ( deg) . 019

RELATI VE MOVEMENTS OF END i WI TH RESPECT TO END j
( Gl obal Pi pi ng Coor di nat e Syst em)

Rel at i ve X Di spl acement - . 399
Rel at i ve Y Di spl acement - . 132
Rel at i ve Z Di spl acement . 095
Rel at i ve Rot at i on about X ( deg) . 000
Rel at i ve Rot at i on about Y ( deg) - 1. 242
Rel at i ve Rot at i on about Z ( deg) . 860


In the previous output, the axial displacement total in the report is the total axial displacement per corrugation
due to axial, lateral, and rotational displacement of the expansion joint ends. This is the value that would be
compared to the rated axial displacement per corrugation. If e
(total)
The y in the report is the total relative lateral displacement of one end of the bellows with respect to the other,
and theta is the total relative angular rotation of one end of the bellows with respect to the other. (Note that
is greater than the rated axial displacement per
corrugation, then there is the possibility of premature bellows failure. Be sure that the displacement rating from
the manufacturer is on a per corrugation basis. If not then multiply the axial displacement total by the number of
corrugations and compare this value to the manufacturers allowable axial displacement. Note that most
manufacturers allowed rating is for some set number of cycles (often 10,000). If the actual number of cycles is
less, then the allowed movement can often be greater. Similarly, if the actual number of cycles is greater than
10,000, then the allowed movement can be smaller. In special situations manufacturers should almost always be
consulted because many factors can affect allowed bellows movement.
CAESAR II

does not include x into the denominator for the lateral displacement calculations as outlined in
EJ MA.


Structural Steel Checks - AISC
Code compliance for structural steel shapes is performed according to the AISC (American Institute of Steel
Construction) code. This code check uses the forces and moments at the ends of the structural members,
computes stresses, and allowables, and determines a unity check value. If the unity check value is less than 1.0,
the member is acceptable for the given loading conditions.
CAESAR II performs the AISC unity check according to either the 1977 or the 1989 edition of the AISC code.
Note Member properties are obtained from the AISC database and used to compute the actual and
allowable stress values for the axial and bending terms comprising the unity check equations. The
specific database is set using the Configure-Setup
To perform
module. The database must be either AISC77.BIN
or AISC89.BIN.
unity check calculations from the Main Menu click Analyze - AISC

.
Global Parameters
After launching this module, the user is presented with the Global Input spreadsheet.

Global I nput Spreadsheet
This screen is used to enter data that applies to all members being evaluated. Particular fields are:


Structural Code
The entry in this field should be either AISC 1977 or AISC 1989 respectively. Users should set this entry to
match the database in use.
Allowable Stress Increase Factor
The Allowable Stress Increase Factor is a multiplication factor applied to the computed values of the axial and
bending allowable stresses. Typically this value is 1.0. However, in extreme events the AISC code permits the
allowable stresses to be increased by a factor. Normally a 1/3 increase is applied to the computed allowables,
making the Allowable Stress Increase Factor =1.33. Examples of extreme events are earthquakes and 100 year
storms. For more details see the AISC code, section 1.5.6.
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz
Cmy and Cmz are interaction formula coefficients for the strong and weak axis of the elements (in-plane and
out-of-plane).
0.85 for compression members in frames subject to joint translation (sidesway).
For restrained compression members in frames braced against sidesway and not subject to
transverse loading between supports in the plane of bending: 0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2); but not less than 0.4
Where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends, of that portion of the
member unbraced in the plane of bending under consideration.
For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of loading and
subject to transverse loading between supports, the value of Cmy may be determined by rational
analysis. However, in lieu of such analysis, the following values are suggested per the AISC code:
0.85 for members whose ends are restrained against rotation in the plane of bending
1.0 for members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation in the plane of bending
Youngs Modulus
The slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this value is usually 29,000,000
psi.
Material Yield Strength
The specified minimum yield stress of the steel being used.
Bending Coefficient
The bending coefficient Cb shall be taken as 1.0 in computing the value of Fby and Fbz for use in Formula 1.6-
1a. Cb shall also be unity when the bending moment at any point in an unbraced length is larger than the moment
at either end of the same length. Otherwise, Cb shall be
Cb =1.75 +1.05(M1/M2) +0.3(M1/M2)
2
Form Factor Qa
but not more than 2.3 where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to
larger moments at the ends.
The form factor is an allowable axial stress reduction factor equal to the effective area divided by the actual area.
(Consult the latest edition of the AISC code for the current computation methods for the effective area.)


Allow Sidesway
The ability of a frame or structure to experience sidesway (joint translation) affects the computation of several of
the coefficients used in the unity check equations. Additionally, for frames braced against sidesway, moments at
each end of the member are required. Normally sidesway is allowed (i.e., the box is checked).
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . .
This check box determines whether or not the AISC program attempts to resize specific members as a result of
the unity check computations. Activating this option requires the user to specify a desired minimum unity check
and a desired maximum unity check. If the computed unity check falls outside this range, the program resizes the
member appropriately. The final member size is shown in the output report.
Minimum Desired Unity Check
This is a required entry if the redesign option has been activated. This entry defines the minimum acceptable
unity check allowed. If a unity check falls below this point, the element is resized to a smaller shape.
Maximum Desired Unity Check
This is a required entry if the redesign option has been activated. This entry defines the maximum acceptable
unity check allowed. If a unity check falls above this point, the element is resized to a larger shape.

Local Member Data
Local Member Data must be entered for each member being evaluated.

Local Member Data Spreadsheet


Particular fields are the following:
Member Start Node
The member start node is the i end of a structural element. The node number entered should be an integer
value between 1 and 32,000. This is a required entry.
Member End Node
The member end node is the j end of a structural element. The node number entered should be an integer value
between 1 and 32,000. This is a required entry.
Member Type
The member type is the AISC shape label found in the AISC manual. The shape label is used to acquire the
member geometric properties from the database. The label entered in this field must match exactly the label in
the database for properties to be obtained. Use the on line help to list typical member designations.
Since many of the angle labels can be found in the single angles, the double angles (long legs back to back), and
the double angles (short legs back to back), require an angle type to tell them apart. This cell should contain a
D for double angles with equal legs, and double angles with long legs back to back. This cell should contain a B
for double angles with short legs back to back.
In- And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz
The coefficients used to compute the strong and weak axis slenderness ratios, respectively are
End Conditions Theoretical K Recommended Design K
fixed-fixed 0.5 0.65
fixed-pinned 0.7 0.8
fixed-sliding 1.0 1.2
pinned-pinned 1.0 1.0
fixed-free 2.0 2.1
pinned-sliding 2.0 2.0
Unsupported Axial Length
This length is the length used to determine the buckling strength of the member. Typically, this is the total length
of the member.
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)
This length is the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the strong axis
of the member.
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending)
This length is the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the weak axis


of the member.
Double Angle Spacing
Double angles normally have a gap or space separating the adjacent legs. The spacing as defined in the AISC
manual must be 0.0, .375, or .75 inches.
Youngs Modulus
The slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this value is usually 29,000,000
psi. This value of Youngs modulus overrides the value specified on the global input spreadsheet.
Material Yield Strength
The specified minimum yield stress of the steel being used. This value of the material yield strength overrides
the value specified on the global input spreadsheet.
Axial Member Force
This is the force (tension or compression) which acts along the axis of the member. The sign of the number is not
significant, since a worst case load condition will be assumed, i.e. all positive loads.
In-Plane Bending Moment
The maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) which will cause bending about the
strong axis Y-Y of the member. The sign of the number is not significant, since a worst case load condition will
be assumed, i.e. all positive loads.
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment
The maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) which will cause bending about the
weak axis Z-Z of the member. The sign of the number is not significant, since a worst case load condition will be
assumed, i.e. all positive loads.
In-Plane Small Bending Moment
For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the smaller of the two
in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.
In-Plane Large Bending Moment
For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the larger of the two
in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.
Out-of-Plane Small Bending Moment
For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the smaller of the two
out-of-plane bending moments which cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member.
Out-of-Plane Large Bending Moment
For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the larger of the two
out-of-plane bending moments which cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member.


AISC Output Reports
The output reports can be directed to either the terminal or a printer. The output report begins with a one page
summary describing the current global data and units. This summary is shown on the following page:

AI SC Output Summary
The remaining pages in the output report show the data for the individual members. The last column of the report
contains the most important data (namely the unity check value) and the governing AISC equation. Two sample
member output reports are shown in the following figures. The first report is applicable to jobs where sidesway
is allowed, the second report is applicable to jobs where sidesway is prevented.

Member Output Report, Sidesway Permitted


Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Codes
There are a few differences between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Code Revisions that affect unity check
computation. The most noticeable difference between these two revisions is that the 1989 code provides a
method for computing the unity check on single angles. This procedure (which was not addressed in the 1977
code) can be found in a special code section following the commentary. The steps necessary to compute the
unity check for single angles can be followed by reviewing the message file (generated upon user request).
The other differences between these two code revisions deal with members in compression. Several constants for
Q
s
have been altered, and a new factor k
c
has been added. k
c
Because of these code differences,
is a compression element restraint coefficient
defined in the 1989 edition of the code.
CAESAR II

stores the name of the active database in the input file for the
AISC Program when the data file is first created. Attempting to switch databases or compute unity checks on
angles using the 1977 code will generate error messages and the program will abort. Users are urged to consult
the applicable AISC Manuals when using this program.


NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)
There are two types of force/moment allowables computed during a NEMA run:
Individual nozzle allowables.
Cumulative equipment allowables.
Each individual suction, discharge, and extraction nozzle must satisfy the equation:
3F + M < 500De
Where:
F = resultant force on the particular nozzle.
M = resultant moment on the particular nozzle.
De = effective nominal pipe size of the connection.
A typical discharge nozzle calculation is shown as follows:

For cumulative equipment allowables NEMA SM23 states "the combined resultants of the forces and moments
of the inlet, extraction, and exhaust connections resolved at the centerline of the exhaust connection", be within
a certain multiple of Dc; where Dc is the diameter of an opening whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of
all of the individual equipment connections. A typical turbine cumulative (summation) equipment calculation is
shown as follows:


SFX, SFY, and SFZ are the respective components of the forces from all connections resolved at the discharge
nozzle. FC(RSLT) is the result of these forces. SMX, SMY and SMZ are the respective components of the
moments from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle. Dc is the diameter of the equivalent opening as
discussed above.

NEMA Turbine Example
Consider a turbine where node 35 represents the inlet nozzle and node 50 represents the outlet nozzle.
The output from a CAESAR II analysis of this piping system includes the forces and moments acting on the pipe
elements that attach to the turbine:
NODE FX FY FZ MX MY MZ
30 -108 -49 -93 73 188 603
35 108 67 93 162 -47 -481
50 -192 7 -11 369 -522 39
55 192 -63 11 78 117 -56
To find the forces acting on the turbine at points 35 and 50 simply reverse the sign of the forces that act on the
piping:
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 35 -108 -67 -93 -162 47 481
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 50 192 -7 11 -369 522 -39
Aside from the description, there is only one input spreadsheet for the NEMA turbine. Applied loads should be
entered in global coordinates or extracted directly from the CAESAR II output file (using the on-screen button).
This interface enables iterative addiction of an arbitrary number of nozzles to the model. To add a nozzle, click
Add Nozzle.


NEMA I nput I nlet


NEMA I nput Exhaust
The first page of the output is the input echo, the second and some of the remaining pages display the individual
nozzle calculations while, the last page displays the summation calculations.
Note The actual number of output pages will vary and depends on the number of nozzles defined in
the input.


NEMA I nput Echo Report
The NEMA output report for the above turbine example shows that the turbine passed. The highest summation
load is only 56% of the allowable. If the turbine had failed, the symbol **FAILED** would have displayed, in
red, under the STATUS column opposite to the load combination that was excessive.


NEMA Output Nozzle Calculations


NEMA Output Summation Calcs


API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps)
In August of 1995, API released the 8th edition of API 610 for centrifugal pumps for general refinery service.
The API 610 load satisfaction criteria is outlined below:
If clause F.1.1 is satisfied, then the pump is O.K. Clause F.1.1 states that the individual component nozzle loads
must fall below the allowables listed in the Nozzle Loadings table (Table 2) shown below:

If clause F.1.1 is NOT satisfied, but clauses F.1.2.1, F.1.2.2, and F.1.2.3 ARE satisfied then the pump is still
O.K.
Clause F.1.2.1 states that the individual component forces and moments acting on each pump nozzle flange shall
not exceed the range specified in Table 2 by a factor of more than 2. Referring to the API 610 report, the user
can see if F.1.2.1 is satisfied by comparing the Force/Moment Ratio to 2. If the ratio exceeds 2, the nozzle status
is reported as FAILING.
The F.1.2.2 and the F.1.2.3 requirements give equations relating the resultant forces and moments on each
nozzle, as well as on the pump base point respectively. The requirements of these equations, and whether or not
they have satisfied API 610, are shown on the bottom of the report.
The following example is taken from the API 610 code and shows the review of an overhung end-suction
process pump in English units. The three CAESAR II input screens are shown, followed by the program output.


API 610 I nput Data


API 610 Suction Nozzle


API 610 Discharge Nozzle



Vertical In-Line Pumps
Note that on the first screen there is a check box for a vertical in-line pump. This is to be used when the pump is
the vertical in-line type supported only by the attached piping. API states that if this is the case then 2.0 times the
loads from Table 2 can be used. However, even if the pump fails the 2.0 Table 2 criteria, it may still pass. If the
principal stress on the nozzle is less than 6,000 psi, then that nozzle passes. If the principal stress on either
nozzle is greater than 6,000 psi, the overall status will be reported as Failed.
In API 610 there is an example problem which illustrates the way stresses are computed on these in-line pump
nozzles. The two basic equations for determining stress are
Stresses (s) = Force / Area + Moment / Section Modulus
Shear Stresses (t) = Force / Area + Torque * distance / J
Where J is the polar moment of inertia.
In the second equation, both terms of the equation will always add together. On the other hand, the Force/Area
term in the first equation will depend on the sign of the force (tension or compression) that the user enters in the
force and moment spreadsheet. The sign of the force is determined from the user-entered Centerline Direction
Cosine, which for vertical in-line pumps should be entered in the direction extending from the discharge to the
suction nozzle. The distances that are usually entered for pedestal mounted pumps can be left blank since they
are not used.


API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)
The requirements of this standard are similar to those of NEMA SM-23 (1991). The allowable load values for
API-617 are approximately 85% higher than the NEMA allowables.
The input screens for this evaluation display below:

API 617 I nput


API 617 Suction/Discharge I nput


API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers)
This calculation covers the allowed loads on the vertical, co-linear nozzles (item 9 in the figure) found on most
single, or multi-bundled air cooled heat exchangers.
The several figures from API 661 illustrate the type of open exchanger body analyzed by this standard.

API 661 Heat Exchangers
The input for API 661 is self-explanatory. The Heat Exchangers figure and the Resultant Force/Multiplier
inputs for Spreadsheet #1 are optional (default equals 1).
The two requirements needed for API 661compliance:
5.1.11.1 - Each nozzle in the corroded condition shall be capable of withstanding the moments and forces
defined in Heat Exchangers figure.

5.1.11.2 - The sum of the forces and moments on each fixed header (i.e. each individual bundle) will be less than
1,500 lb. transverse to the bundle, 2,500 lb. axial to the bundle, and 3,000 pound axial on the nozzle centerline.
The allowed moments are 3,000, 2,000, and 4,000 ft.lb. respectively. This recognizes that the application of
these moments and forces will cause movement and that this movement will tend to reduce the actual loads.


API 661 I nput Data


API 661 I nlet Nozzle Data


API 661 Outlet Nozzle Data


A typical API 661 report is shown as follows:


Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters
This module of theCAESAR II Rotating Equipment
The method employed by HEI is a simplification of the WRC 107 method, where the allowable loads have been
linearized to show the relationship between the maximum permitted radial force and the maximum permitted
moment vector. If this relationship is plotted (using the moments as the abscissa and the forces as the ordinate), a
straight line can be drawn between the maximum permitted force and the maximum permitted moment vector,
forming a triangle with the axes. Then for any set of applied forces and moments, the nozzle passes if the
location of these loads falls inside the triangle. Conversely, the nozzle fails if the location of the loads falls
outside the triangle. The
program provides a method for evaluating the allowable
loads on shell type heat exchanger nozzles. Section 3.14 of the HEI bulletin discusses the computational methods
used to compute these allowable loads.
CAESAR II HEI output has been modified to include both the plot of the allowables
and the location of the current load set on this plot. The HEI bulletin states that the effect of internal pressure has
been included in the combined stresses; however, the effect of the pressure on the nozzle thrust has not. This
requires combination with the other radial loads. CAESAR II automatically computes the pressure thrust and adds
it to the radial force if the Add Pressure Thrust check box is enabled. A sample input for the HEI module is
shown below. Note that since the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force will be computed and
combined with the radial force.

HEI Nozzle/Vessel I nput


API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)
This module of the CAESAR II Rotating Equipment
Input consists of the tube nominal diameter and the forces and moments acting on the tube, as shown in the
figure below:
Program provides a method for evaluating the allowable
loads on Fired Heaters.

API 560 I nput Data
Upon execution of the analysis, CAESAR II compares the input forces and moments to the allowables as
published in API 560 Example output is shown below.


API 560 Equipment Report

Index
3
3D Graphic Highlights 4-57
Diameters, Wall, Insulation, Cladding &
Refractory Thickness, Materials, Piping
Codes 4-57
3D Graphics Configuration 4-52
3D Graphics Highlights
Corrosion and Densities 4-58
Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads,
Wind/Wave Loads 4-60
Temp.and Press. 3-9
Temperature and Pressure 3-9
3D Graphics Interactive Feature
Walk Through 4-64
3D HOOPs Graphics 9-7
3-D Modeler 4-46
3D/HOOPS Graphics 9-7
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Animation Processor
8-16
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Output Processor 6-
34
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output
Processor 6-34
3D/HOOPS in the Animation Processor 8-16
A
About the CAESAR II Documentation 1-5
ABS 5-27
ABS Method 7-30
Actual cold loads 5-29
Adjust Deflection Scale 6-34
Advanced 7-23, 7-35
Advanced Parameters Show Screen 7-23
AISC code comparisons 11-40
AISC database 9-2
AISC output reports 11-39
AISC Output Reports 11-39
AISC unity checks
Allow sidesway 11-34
Allowable stress increase factor 11-34
Bending coefficient 11-34
Double angle spacing 11-36
Fixity coefficients 11-36
Form factor qa 11-34
Member type 11-36
Stress reduction factors 11-34
Structural code 11-34
Algebraic 5-27
Allowable stress increase factor 11-34
Allowable Stresses 4-21
Alpha tolerance 4-6
Ambient temperature 4-6
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model 10-10
Analysis Menu 3-7
Analyzing the dynamics job
Eigensolver 7-36
Mode shapes 7-36
Performing a harmonic analysis
For 7-37
Pha 7-37
Performing a modal analysis
Eigens 7-36
Freque 7-36
Modes 7-36
Natura 7-36
Sturm 7-36
Performing a spectral analysis
Mas 7-38
Selection of phase angles
Harmonic 7-37
Angle spacing, double 11-36
Animation
Motion 6-38
Animation of Dynamic Results odal/Spectrum 8-
17
Animation of Dynamic Results-Harmonic 8-17
Animation of Dynamic Resultsime History 8-17
Animation of Dynamic Results-Modal/Spectrum
8-17
Animation of Dynamic Results-Time History 8-
17
Animation of Static Results - Displacements 8-
17
Animation of Static Results Notes 6-38
Announcing Builds 1-8
ANSI B16.5 11-20
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery
Services) 11-62
API 605 rating tables 11-20
API 610
Centrifugal pumps
Load Satisfaction Criteria, API 610 11-48
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) 11-48
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) 11-54
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) 11-56
Application guide 1-5

2 Index

Applications of CAESAR II 1-3
Archive 5-18
Archiving and reinstalling 1-9
Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched
Version 1-9
ASCE #7 wind loads 5-15
ASCE7 7-12
Auxiliary Data Area 4-10
Auxiliary data fields
Auxiliary screens 4-10
Expansion joint
Effective diameter of b 4-14
Pressure thrust in expa 4-14
Axial length, Unsupported 11-36
Axial member force 11-36
B
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response
Spectrum 7-17
Backfill 10-8
Backfill efficiency 10-8
Bandwidth 5-18
Basic load cases 5-20
Basic Load Cases 5-22
Basic operation 2-6
Basic Operation 2-6
Batch run 5-2
Bend Stress Intensification Factors 11-6
Bending coefficient 11-34
Bending moment, In-plane 11-36
Bending moment, Out-of-plane 11-36
Bending stress 11-12
Bends with Trunnions 11-8
Bilinear springs 10-8
Bilinear supports 10-8
Bolt tightening stress 11-19
Bolt Tightening Stress Notes 11-19
Bolts and gasket 11-15
Boundary Conditions 4-8, 8-4
BS-806 11-8
Building Load Cases 2-11
Building static load cases 5-5
Building Static Load Cases 5-8
Building the load cases 2-11
Builds, Version 1-8
Buried pipe displacements 10-3
Buried pipe example 10-16
Buried Pipe Modeling 10-1
Buried pipe restraints 10-3
C
C2Isogen Export 3-12
CADWorx/Plant 1-4
CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng) 10-9
CAESAR II Quick Reference 2-2
CAESAR II, About 1-2
Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version? 1-8
Center of gravity report 2-9
Tutorial 2-9
Code compliance 7-3
Code Compliance Report 6-25
Code Stress Colors by Percent 6-34
Code Stress Colors by Value 6-34
Code stresses for dynamics 8-4
Cold loads 5-29
Column reports 6-2
Combination load cases 5-20
Combination Method 7-30
Combination Methods 5-27
Concentrated forces 7-2
Connecting nodes 9-17
Construction element 4-7
Control Parameters 7-3, 7-23, 7-26, 7-31, 7-35
Corroded pipelines, B31G
Calculating corroded area 11-23
Flaw Lengt 11-23
Cumulative usage 8-4
Cumulative Usage Report 6-26
Custom Reports 6-9
Custom Reports Toolbar 6-8, 6-14
Customizable Toolbar 4-3, 4-4
Customize Toolbar 4-3
Cutoff frequency 7-23
Cyclic stress range 7-2
D
Damping 7-26
Data Fields 4-4
Definition of a Load Case 5-20
Deflected Shape 6-34
Densities 4-9
Design
CADWorx/PIPE 1-4
Diagnostics Menu 3-16
Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC
Codes 11-40
Disp 5-25
Disp/Force 5-25
Disp/Force/Stress 5-25
Disp/Stress 5-25
Displacement load case 5-28

Index 3

Displacements 4-15, 6-14, 8-4
DLF spectrum generator 7-20
DLF/Spectrum Generator 7-8
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard
7-8
Double angle spacing 11-36
Driving frequencies 7-3
Dynamic amplitude 7-2
Dynamic analysis input processor 7-5
Dynamic analysis types 7-5
Dynamic input commands 7-5
Initiating dynamic input 7-5
Prerequisites for dynamic inp 7-5
Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview 7-5
Dynamic capabilities
Harmonic analysis 7-2
Concentrated forces 7-2
Cyclic stress range 7-2
Dynamic amplitude 7-2
Equipment start-up 7-2
Fluid pulsation 7-2
Forcing frequencies 7-2
Phase angle 7-2
Rotating equipment 7-2
Vibration 7-2
Modal analysis 7-2
Mode shapes 7-2
Natural frequency 7-2
Spectrum analysis 7-2
Impulse analysis 7-2
Relief valve 7-2
Response spectrum meth 7-2
Response vs. frequency 7-2
Sustained stresses in 7-2
Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II 7-2
Dynamic imbalance 7-24
Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-1
Dynamic load case number 7-30
Dynamic load factor 7-32
Dynamic load specification 7-3
Dynamic Output Processing 8-1, 8-2
Boundary conditions 8-4
Friction resista 8-4
Nonlinear restra 8-4
Forces/stresses, dynamics 8-4
Global forces, dynamics 8-4
Harmonic results 8-2
General results 8-2
Included mass data 8-4
% Force active 8-4
% Force added 8-4
% Mass included 8-4
Extracted modes 8-4
Missing mass corr 8-4
System response 8-4
Local forces, dynamics 8-4
Mass model 8-4
Lumped masses 8-4
Mass participation factors 8-4
Modes mass normalized 8-4
Modes unity normalized 8-4
Natural frequencies 8-4
Report types, dynamics
Displacements 8-4
Report option 8-4
Restraints, dynamics 8-4
Maximum load on 8-4
Maximum modal c 8-4
Mode identifica 8-4
Spectrum results 8-2
Static/dynamic comb 8-2
Stresses, dynamics 8-4
Code stresses for 8-4
Stress intensific 8-4
Stress report 8-4
Time history results 8-2
E
Earthquake (Spectrum) 7-27
Earthquake input spectrum
Spectrum definitions 7-27
Response spect 7-27
Shock definiti 7-27
Spectrum data 7-27

4 Index

Spectrum name 7-27
Spectrum load cases
Earthquake 7-29
El Centro earth 7-29
Independent sup 7-29
Spectrum load cases example 7-29
Static/dynamic combinations
ABS 7-30
Combina 7-30
Hanger 7-30
Occasio 7-30
Piping 7-30
SRSS 7-30
Sustain 7-30
Earthquakes 7-21
Edit Dynamic Load Case 4-30
Edit Menu 4-30
Edit Static Load Case 4-30
Effective diameter 4-14
Effective gasket modulus 11-20
Eigensolution 7-3
Eigensolver 7-36
EJ MA (expansion joint manufacturers association)
11-27
El centro 7-27
Element Direction Cosines 4-5
Element length 10-3
Element Lengths 4-4
End connections 9-2
Entering the dynamic analysis input menu 7-5
Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu 7-5
Entering the Static Output Processor 6-2
Entry into the Processor 8-2
Environment Menu 4-38
Equipment and component evaluation 11-2
Bend SIFs
Trunnion 11-6
Bends with trunnions
Trunn 11-8
Equipment checks 11-2
Flanges attached to bend en 11-8
Intersection SIFs 11-3
Pressure stiffening
Flexibile 11-7
Stress 11-7
Stress concentrations and i 11-8
Equipment and Component Evaluation 11-2
Equipment Checks/Screening 4-15
Equipment Component and Compliance 11-1
Equipment start-up 7-2
Error Check 5-2
Error checking 5-2
Errors, warnings, and notes 5-2
Error Checking 5-2
Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-1
Error Checking the Model 2-9
Error Handling and Analyzing the J ob 7-36
Errors
Errors and warnings 2-9
ESL 7-36
ESL Menu 3-17
Example 10-16
Excitation frequency 7-24
Executing Static Analysis 2-12
Execution of Static Analysis 5-18
Expansion J oint 4-7, 4-14, 4-35
Expansion joint rating 11-27
Ejma 11-27
Maximum axial movement 11-27
Maximum lateral deflection 11-27
Maximum rotation 11-27
Output 11-27
Expansion J oint Rating 11-27
Expansion load cases 2-11, 5-28
Exporting Displacements To A File 4-42
External software lock
ESL updating 3-17
Extracted modes 8-4
F
Fatal error dialog 5-3
Fatal Error Message 5-3
Fatigue (FAT) 5-5, 5-20
Fatigue curve 4-21
Fatigue curve data 4-21
Fatigue curve dialog 4-21
Fatigue failure 8-4
Fatigue load cases 8-4
Fatigue loadings 6-26
Fatigue stress types 5-5, 7-24, 7-29, 8-4
Fatigue-type load cases 6-26
File Menu 3-3, 4-28
Filtering Reports 6-12
Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info 4-61
Fixity coefficients ky and kz 11-36
Fixity coefficients, AISC 11-36
Flange Checks - Equipment Screening 4-10

Index 5

Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations 11-15
Flange Leakage 11-15
Methodology 11-15
Flange rating
ANSI B16.5 11-20
API 605 11-20
Rating Table 11-20
Leak pressure ratio
Gasket 11-20
Flange modeler 11-20
Flange rating 11-20
Flange Reports 6-20
Flanges Attached to Bend Ends 11-8
Flaw length 11-23
Flexible Nozzles 4-24
Fluid pulsation 7-2
Force 5-25
Force Sets 7-3, 7-21, 7-33, 7-34
Force spectrum methodology 7-32
Force Stress 5-25
Forces 4-17
Forces/stresses 8-4
Force-time profiles 7-33, 7-34
Forcing frequency 7-2, 7-37
Form factor QA 11-34
Frequency 7-24
Frequency cutoff 7-36
Friction Multiplier 5-25
Friction resistance 8-4
Full Run 1-10
G
Gasket factor 11-20
General Computed Results 6-27
Global Element Forces 6-21
Global forces 8-4
Global Parameters 11-34
H
Hanger 4-25, 5-29
Hanger Design 5-25
Hanger design control data 4-35
Hanger selection
Actual cold loads 5-29
Additional hanger 5-29
Design load cases 5-29
Hanger sizing load cases 5-29
Hot load 5-29
Operating load cases 5-29
Recommended load cases 5-29
Restrained weight 5-29
Spring hanger design 5-29
Hanger sizing 5-29, 7-30
Hanger Stiffness 5-25
Hanger Table with Text 6-28
Hangers 4-25
Harmonic 7-24, 7-37
Harmonic analysis 7-2, 7-3
Harmonic analysis input
Harmonic displacements 7-24
Harmonic forces 7-24
Harmonic load definition 7-24
Excitation f 7-24
Phasing of harmonic loads
Damping 7-26
Frequency 7-24
Harmonic co 7-26
Harmonic fo 7-24
Pressure wa 7-24
Reciprocati 7-24
Rotating eq 7-24
Harmonic control parameters 7-26
Harmonic displacements 7-24
Harmonic force 7-24
Harmonic loads 7-24
Harmonic results 7-37, 8-2
Harmonic stress 7-37
Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed
Feedwater Heaters 11-61
Heat exchangers 11-56
HEI standard for closed feedwater heaters 11-61
Help Menu 3-19
HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations 4-56
Hot load 5-29
I
IBC 7-13
Identifying Builds 1-8
IGE/TD/12 4-5
Importing Displacements From A File 4-42

6 Index

Impulse 7-22
Impulse analysis 7-2
Included mass data 8-4
Incore solution 5-18
Independent support motion 7-29
Index numbers, structural steel input 9-2
In-plane bending moment 11-36
In-plane large bending moment 11-36
In-plane small bending moment 11-36
Input Echo 6-28
Input listing 8-4
Input Menu 3-6
Input Overview Based on Analysis Category 7-7
Installing Builds 1-9
Insulation density 4-9
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors 11-3
Introduction 1-1
K
Kaux menu items
Include Piping Input Files 4-38
Include structural input files 4-38
Review sifs 4-38
Review SIFs at Bend Node 4-38
Special execution parameters 4-38
Kaux-include structural files 9-2
L
Lateral bearing length 10-3
Leak pressure ratio 11-20
Lease 1-10
License types
Full run 1-10
Lease 1-10
Limited run 1-10
Limited Run 1-10
Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info. Find
Node, Range, Cuttin 4-61
Load Case Definition in CAESAR II 5-8
Load case list 5-5
Load Case Options Tab 5-25
Load Case Report 6-27
Load cases 2-2, 2-13, 4-6, 4-8, 4-25, 4-28, 5-5,
5-18, 5-20, 5-29, 6-2, 6-26, 6-32, 6-38, 7-
22, 7-24, 7-27, 7-38, 8-2, 8-4, 9-2, 9-28,
11-9
Basic load cases 2-11
Combination load cases 2-11, 5-20
Example of load cases 5-20
Expansion load case 5-28
Occasional load cases 5-28
Stress category 5-20
Stress types 5-20
Sustained load case 5-28
Types of load cases 2-11
Types of loads 5-20
Load Cases for Other Types of Occasional Loads
5-11
Load Cases with Hanger Design 5-9
Load Cases with Pitch and Roll 5-10
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements 5-9
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and
Settlement 5-10
Load cycles 5-20
Load, Ultimate 10-8
Loading Conditions 4-8
Local Element Forces 6-22
Local forces 8-4
Local Member Data 11-36
Lumped masses 7-7
M
Main menu 3-2
Analysis
Menu items 3-7
File 2-2
Default data directory 3-3
Input file types 3-3
New command 3-3
Open command 3-3
Select an existing job file 3-3
Input
Data entry 2-6
Input menu items 3-6
Main Menu 3-1
Major Steps in Dynamic Input 7-4
Mass and stiffness model 7-3
Mass and stiffness model, Modifying 7-22, 7-25,
7-31, 7-33, 7-35
Mass correction, Missing 8-4
Mass model 7-7, 8-4
Mass participation factors 7-38, 8-4

Index 7

Material Elastic Properties 4-9
Material fatigue curve 4-21
Material name 4-8
Material number 4-8
Material yield strength 11-34, 11-36
Max 5-27
Maximum Code Stress 6-34
Maximum desired unity check 11-34
Maximum Displacements 6-34
Maximum Restraints Loads 6-34
Member data, Local 11-36
Member end node 11-36
Member start node 11-36
Member type 11-36
Membrane stress 11-12
Menu Commands 4-28
Mexican Response Spectrum 7-15
Min 5-27
Minimum desired unity check 11-34
Miscellaneous Data 6-29
Missing mass correction 8-4
Modal 7-7
Modal analysis 7-2
Modal analysis input
Control parameters
Cutoff frequency 7-23
Modes of vibration 7-23
Lumped masses 7-7
System response 7-7
Mass model 7-7
System response 7-7
Mode identification line 8-4
Mode shapes 7-2, 7-36
Model Menu 4-35
Model menu items
Expansion joints 4-35
Hanger design control data 4-35
Title 4-35
Valve 4-35
Model modifications for dynamic analysis
Control parameter 7-3
Dynamics 7-3
Conversion 7-3
Mass and st 7-3
Specifying loads 7-3
Cod 7-3
Dri 7-3
Dyn 7-3
For 7-3
Har 7-3
Loa 7-3
Nat 7-3
Occ 7-3
Poi 7-3
Sho 7-3
Sta 7-3
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis 7-3
Modeler Overview 10-2
Modes 7-36
Modes mass normalized 8-4
Modes of vibration 7-7, 7-23, 7-36
Modes unity normalized 8-4
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model 7-22, 7-25,
7-31, 7-33, 7-35
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models 7-35
More 6-2
Motion 6-38
N
Natural frequencies 7-3, 7-7, 7-36, 8-4
NEMA SM23
Steam turbines
Cumulative equipment calculations, N 11-41
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) 11-41
NEMA Turbine Example 11-42
Node Names 4-26
Node Numbers 4-4
Nominal pipe size 4-5
Nonlinear restraints 5-18, 8-4
Note dialog 5-8
Note Message 5-5, 5-8
Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases 5-20
Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File 6-
32, 8-15
Notes on the Soil Model 10-8
Nozzle Check Report 6-19
Nozzle data 11-9
Nozzle flexibility 11-14

8 Index

Nozzle loads 11-9
Nozzle screen 11-14
O
Obtaining Builds 1-8
Occasional dynamic stresses 7-30
Occasional load cases 5-28
Occasional stress 7-2, 7-3, 7-30
Offsets 4-27
Operating Conditions
Temperatures and Pressures 4-6
Out-of-plane bending moment 11-36
Out-of-plane large bending moment 11-36
Out-of-plane small bending moment 11-36
Output Menu 3-10
Output Type 5-25
Output Viewer Wizard 6-31
Ovalization, bends 11-8
Overstress 6-34
Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II
9-2
P
Peak stress index 11-8
Performing the Analysis 7-36
Phase angle 7-2, 7-24, 7-37
Phasing 7-24
Pipe modeler 10-3
Pipe Section Properties 4-5
Piping codes for earthquakes 7-30
Piping dimensions 9-17
Piping input 2-6
Alpha tolerance 4-6
Ambient temperature 4-6
Construction element 4-7
Densities 4-9
Expansion joints 4-7
Input spreadsheet 4-2
Insulation density 4-9
Material name 4-8
Material number 4-8
Nominal pipe size 4-5
Rigid elements 4-7
Sif & tees 4-7
Specific gravity 4-9
Stress intensification factors 4-7
Thermal strains 4-6
Piping Input 4-1
Piping Input Generation 2-6
Piping job 9-2
Piping Material 4-8
Piping System Loads 5-20
Plot 4-46
Plotting
Static output review 2-13
Tutorial 2-6
Point loads 7-3
Pressure Stiffening 11-7
Pressure thrust 4-14
Pressure vs. elevation table 5-15
Pressure wave 7-24
Printing or saving reports to a file 8-15
Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes 6-32
Proctor number 10-8
Produced Results Data 5-25
Program support 1-6
Technical support phone numbers 1-6
Training 1-6
Program Support/User Assistance 1-6
Providing Wind Data 5-15
Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation 7-8, 7-33
Q
Quick reference 2-2
Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-1
R
Reciprocating pumps 7-24
Recommended Load Cases 5-28
Recommended Load Cases Hanger Selection 5-29
Recommended Procedures 10-15
Relief Load Synthesis 7-32
Relief Loads (Spectrum) 7-32
Relief loads spectrum
Force sets for relief loads
Earthquakes 7-21
Relief valv 7-21
Skewed load 7-21
Water hamme 7-21
Relief load synthesis
Dynamic load fact 7-32
Force spectrum me 7-32
Relief valve 7-32
Thrust loads 7-32
Spectrum definitions
DLF spectrum gener 7-20
Spectrum data 7-20

Index 9

Spectrum load cases
Impulse 7-22
Time history 7-22
Relief valve 7-2, 7-21, 7-32, 7-33
Remaining Strength Corroded Pipeline B31G
11-23
Report Options 6-14
Report Template Editor 6-9
Report Types 8-4
Reports Navigation Toolbar 6-6
Resize members 11-34
Resize Model/Element Stretch 4-5
Response spectrum method 7-2
Response spectrum table 7-27
Response vs. frequency spectra 7-2
Restrained weight 5-29
Restraint auxiliary data 9-17
Restraint Report Local Element Coordinate 6-16
Restraint Summary 6-18
Restraints 4-13, 6-15, 8-4
Review Current Units 4-30
Review Units 4-30
Rigid elements 4-7
Rigid Weight 4-12
Rotating equipment 7-2, 7-24
S
Sample Input 9-9
Save Animation to File 8-17
Save As Graphics Image 4-61
Scalar 5-27
Screens 4-10
Seismic analysis 7-2
Select by Single Click 6-34
Select Case Names 6-2
Selection of Phase Angles 7-37
Shape factor, wind 5-15
Shock definition 7-27
Shock results 7-3
Shock spectra 7-2
Show Event Viewer Gr 6-34
Sidesway 11-34
Sidesway, AISC 11-34
SIFs & tees 4-7
SignMax 5-27
SignMin 5-27
Skewed load 7-21
Slug flow
Specifying the load
Force sets, slug flow 7-33
Force-time profile 7-33
Load cases, slug flow 7-33
Relief load synthesizer 7-33
Relief valve 7-33
Water hammer 7-33
Slug flow analysis 7-2
Snubbers 7-7
Snubbers Active 5-25
Software revision procedures 1-8
Software Revision Procedures 1-8
Soil model 10-8
Soil model numbers 10-8
Soil Models 10-3
Soil properties 10-2
Soil stiffnesses 10-2
Soil supports 10-8
Special Element Information 4-7
Special execution parameters 4-38
Specific gravity 4-9
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters 5-17
Specifying loads, dynamics 7-3
Specifying The Load 7-33, 7-34
Specifying Loads 7-7, 7-24, 7-27, 7-32, 7-33, 7-34
Spectrum 7-38
Spectrum analysis 7-2
Spectrum data 7-20, 7-27
Spectrum Definitions 7-20, 7-33
Spectrum Load cases 7-22, 7-29, 7-33, 8-2
Spectrum name 7-27
Spectrum results 8-2
Spectrum/Load Cases 7-22
Spreadsheet overview 4-2
Spreadsheet Overview 4-2
Spring hanger design 5-29
SRSS 5-27, 7-30
Start, CAESAR II 2-2
Starting CAESAR II 2-2
Static Load Case Editor 5-6
Static load case number 7-30
Static load cases
Building static load cases 5-5
Limitations of the load case editor 5-5
Static output plot 9-17
Static output processor

10 Index

132 column reports 6-2
Animation of static solution 6-2
Commands in static output 6-2
Initiating the static output processor 6-2
Plotting statics 6-2
Report options 6-2
Report titles 6-2
View-reports 6-2
Static Output Processor 6-1
Static output review 2-13
Plotting static output 2-13
Static results 7-3
Static Seismic Load Cases 5-12
Static solution methodology 5-18
Archive 5-18
Incore solution
Bandwidth 5-18
Nonlinear restrai 5-18
Static analysis
Stiffness matrix 5-18
Static/Dynamic Combinations 7-22, 7-30, 7-33,
7-35, 8-2
Stiffness matrix 5-18
Stiffness model, Modifying 7-22, 7-25, 7-31, 7-
33, 7-35
Stress 5-25
Stress category 5-20
Stress concentration factor 11-8
Stress Concentrations and Intensification 11-8
Stress increase factor
AISC 11-34
Stress increase factor, Allowable 11-34
Stress intensification factors 4-7, 8-4
Stress Intensification Factors/Tees 4-23
Stress reduction factors cmy and cmz 11-34
Stress reduction factors, aisc 11-34
Stress report 8-4
Stress Summary 6-24
Stress types 2-11, 5-5, 5-20, 7-29
Stresses 6-23, 8-4
Stresses, Allowable 4-21
Structural capability in CAESAR II 9-2
Structural code 11-34
Structural code, AISC 11-34
Structural files, Include 4-38
Structural Steel Checks - AISC 11-34
Structural Steel Example #1 9-10
Structural steel input 9-2
AISC database, structural steel input 9-2
Connecting pipe to structure 9-17
Connectin 9-17
Displaced 9-17
Editing structural steel input 9-2
End connections,structural steel input 9-2
Format of structural steel input 9-2
Include in piping job 9-2
Include a struct 9-2
Kaux-include str 9-2
Index numbers, structural steel input 9-2
Initiate structural steel input
Struct 9-2
Initiating structural steel input 9-2
Help 9-2
Keywords in structural steel input 9-2
Running structural steel input 9-2
Static output plot 9-17
Range command 9-17
Structural Steel Modeler 9-1
Structure dimensions 9-17
Structure nodes 9-17
Sturm sequence check 7-36
Sustained load cases 5-28
Sustained stresses 7-2, 7-30
Sustained sustained load cases 2-11
System response 7-7, 8-4
T
Technical reference manual 1-5
The CAESAR II Main Menu 3-2
The Spectrum Wizard 7-8
Thermal load case 5-28
Thermal strains 4-6
Thrust loads 7-32
Time history 7-22, 7-34, 7-38
Force-time profiles 7-34
Vibration 7-34
Time History 7-34, 7-38
Time history analysis 7-2
Time history load case 8-2
Time history load cases 7-29, 7-35
Time History Load Cases 7-35
Time History Profile Definitions 7-34
Time history results 8-2
Time vs. force 7-34
Title 4-35
Tools Menu 3-11, 4-41

Index 11

Training 1-6
Trunnion 11-6, 11-8
Tutorial
Center of gravity report, tutorial 2-9
Plotting, tutorial 2-6
Sample model input, tutorial 2-6
U
UBC 7-9
Underground pipe modeler 10-2, 10-3
Underground pipe/buried pipe
Bilinear supports 10-8
Bilinear sprin 10-8
Soil supports 10-8
Ultimate load 10-8
Yield displace 10-8
Yield stiffnes 10-8
Convert input command 10-3
Element length 10-3
Buried pipe displ 10-3
Lateral bearing l 10-3
Meshing
Lateral bearing meshes 10-3
Overburden Compaction Multiplier 10-8
Soil model numbers 10-8
Spreadsheet
Buried element descr 10-3
Underground pipe modeler 10-2
Buried 10-3
Soil pr 10-2
Soil st 10-2
Zones 10-3
Lateral bearing regions 10-3
Uniform Loads 4-19
Unsupported axial length 11-36
Unsupported length (in-plane bending) 11-36
Unsupported length (out-of-plane bending) 11-
36
Updates and License Types 1-10
Usage factor 8-4
User assistance
Training 1-6
User Control of Produced Results Data 5-25
User Defined Time History Waveform 7-18
User-Controlled Combination Methods 5-27
Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler 11-20
Using the Underground Pipe Modeler 10-3
V
Valve 4-35
Velocity vs. elevation table 5-15
Vertical In-Line Pumps 11-53
Vessel attachment stresses/WRC 107
Input data, WRC 107 11-9
Nozzle data, WRC 107 11-9
Nozzle loads, WRC 107 11-9
Curv 11-9
Inte 11-9
Reinforcing pad 11-9
Stress summations, WRC 107 11-12
Vessel data 11-9
Vibration 7-2, 7-34
View Menu 3-18
View Output 4-30
W
Warning Message 5-4
Warnings 6-30
Water hammer 7-21
Specifying the load
Force sets, slug flow 7-33
Force-time profile 7-33
Load cases, slug flow 7-33
Relief load synthesizer 7-33
Relief valve 7-33
Slug problems 7-33
Water hammer analysis 7-2
Water hammer/slug flow (spectrum) 7-33
Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) 7-33
Welding Research Council Bulletin 297 11-14
What are the Applications of CAESAR II? 1-3
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe
Stress Packages? 1-4
What is CAESAR II? 1-2
What is Contained In A Specific Build? 1-8
Wind data

12 Index

ASCE #7 wind loads 5-15
Methods of wind loading 5-15
Pressure vs. elevation table 5-15
Shape factor 5-15
Velocity vs. elevation table 5-15
Wind/Wave 4-20
WRC 107 (vessel stresses) 11-9
WRC 107 Stress Summations 11-12
WRC 107 Vessel Stresses 11-9
WRC 297
Nozzle flexibility 11-14
Nozzle screen 11-14
WRC axes orientation 11-9
WRC Bulletin 297 11-14
Y
Yield displacement 10-8
Yield stiffness 10-8
Young's modulus 11-34, 11-36
Z
Zone definitions 10-3

Caesar II 2011 User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Caesar II 2011 User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Caesar II 2011 User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAESAR II 2011 User Guide

Copyright 1985-2011 Intergraph CAS Inc., All Rights Reserved.

menu may be used to do the following:

0.4 for silt

You might also like